Home

Panasonic 524X07801B Telephone User Manual

1. Class of Service Features 14 MCO Incoming Call Answer Allow Restrict 15 Paging Allow Restrict 16 Auto Repeat Dial Allow Restrict 17 DND Set Clear Allow Restrict 18 DND Set Clear Other Allow Restrict 19 Call Forward All Calls Allow Restrict 20 Call Forward No Answer Allow Restrict 21 Call Forward Busy Allow Restrict 22 Call Forward Other Allow Restrict 23 User Maintenance Log in Allow Restrict 24 Priority Message Waiting Send VM Allow Restrict 25 Message Waiting Send Allow Restrict 26 System Mode Switch Allow Restrict 27 Busy Override Send Allow Restrict 28 Manual Camp On Send Allow Restrict 29 Manual Camp On Receive Allow Restrict 30 Callback Request Send Allow Restrict 31 Callback Request Receive Allow Restrict 32 Trunk Queuing Allow Restrict 33 Manual DND Override Send Allow Restrict 34 Forced DND Override Allow Restrict 35 8 Party Conference Allow Restrict 36 Voice Call Send Allow Restrict 37 Voice Call Receive Allow Restrict 38 Dial Tone Stop Allow Restrict 39 Dial Tone Pre Pause Check Check No check 40 Long Talk Alarm for Outgoing CO Calls Enable Disable 41 Recall Timer Apply Recall to Extension Recall to Attendant 42 Forced ARS Not Forced Forced 43 API Event Reporting No Yes 44 Call Forward Outside Allow Deny 45 Onhook Trunk to Trunk Transfer Allow Deny 46 Station Call Park Answer Allow Deny 47 Station Call Park Tran
2. TRS Class Forced or Not Forced ebd d ony Erne No Account Entry Account Entry Not Forced Non Verified Extension Port Based TRS Extension Port Based TRS Class Class Verified Account Code Based TRS Class Forced Non Verified TRS Class for Forced Extension Port Based TRS Account Code Class Verified FF1 0 19 0001 Account Code Based TRS Class Attendant Group Calls CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialing the designated attendant number Operation To call an attendant group Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the attendant pilot number default 0 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan e FF3 0 Extension Number e FF5 0 Attendant Hunt Groups Considerations e Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group e attendant pilot number is flexible famember of an attendant group is for a virtual extension multiple extensions in the attendant group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialed e Attendant calls are always tone calls i e not voice calls 206 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Auto Repeat Dial CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description If you press
3. Complete the call and replace the handset Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A 284 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features ime eminaer ca CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature Operation To set the Timed Reminder Call feature Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Timed Reminder Set code default 31 3 Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound Enter the time in 24 hour format For example 0100 for 1 AM 1300 for 1 4 Replace the handset To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code default 39 3 Replace the handset Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations e alarm tone default 60 seconds will be issued at the specified time e Anextension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time To change the Reminder Call simply enter a new time Ifthe extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled the reminder call is issued 3 minutes later 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 285 Chapter 7 SLT Feat
4. 84 Set Extension Names c oe wee non none pira ee 5 86 Set Verified Account Codes 87 Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice 89 Set Message Key ID Code 90 Set Mode Schedule 5 4 sale hee Mane RU Puri QS ne 91 Set Special Day gh OA Tn Im CORRER Wa ha 93 Set Exception Day 99 Set Day of Week Mode 101 Set Walking TRS Codes iso usar enn haa a RR e 103 Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension 104 Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension 105 Set Caller ID Logging Extensions 106 Chapter 5 Key Telephone 5 109 Key Telephone ens 1308 aa oh 112 Account COGS ini eet Roe eie ede a ouo ae Ra a e ees 112 Non Verified Account Codes 113 Verified Account Codes 0000 ccc es 114 Attendant Group Calls 00 0c cece 115 Auto Repeat Dial aaa wee Wil Ole ty dc 116 Background Music i065 eee ee ee ee eee RR ee 116 Busy Overrid 142a
5. AR enne p a ERO GC eae cle D e 234 Offhook Voice Announce seseeeeeeeeeee enn nnn 235 sva vacas wer he We enter aa kt be hwnd eee 236 Meet Me Answer ouis ETE IEEE Went 6 See ee oe BS Cata ie ee 237 Reset iik au ROCA RR se ee Chee ee wan 237 Speed Dialing iii eee egy xau Ro Rm echo eee a e 238 Personal Speed ek mb a gc ANE oat pies 238 System speed Dial sta S ERE AO WE oe dure eee Dota See 240 speed Dial Linking ety ye Ru x ae eee ees ERE ERE a CE EE ES NE 241 Timed Reminder Call cae eee ee E RE EETa qd EE bs ee xc 242 ZUR ACCOSS iau conce eee 243 Direct Tr nk ACCESS sve esr MES Gene PEE REESE ETE C ve 244 MCO Trunk ACCESS ket dtr oa ves KEW PARU EE RENE T Re E EO E 244 Trunk QUCUING i5 554a koe REN nd xe CR AUR EROR CR QR CIR Ca a t 245 Walking TRS Class of Service 246 Chapter 7 SLT Features 249 ACCOUNT Codes vcio uada d ra ete eee chad Seedy de M Rice da icd 251 Non Verified Account Codes eue sur sobs ee see os ecran eho tee vla 251 Verified Account Codes ese 2 5 5095 ee Neuse ee Se I EN NU RE 252 8 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Contents Attendant Group Calls 0000 eee 253
6. 10 Repeat steps 7 9 until the remaining days in the month are set Note The entry positions are listed in Table 12 on page 102 11 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode 3 D of Week PTN displays 12 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 OR User MAINT displays To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF OR key ON OFF LED goes off Table 12 Day of the Month addresses ADDRESSES DAY OCCURRENCE FOR THESE e g 1st Sunday address 300 2nd Sunday address 307 DAYS OF THE WEEK 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th Sunday 300 307 314 321 328 Monday 301 308 315 322 329 102 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance ADDRESSES DAY OCCURRENCE FOR THESE e g 1st Sunday address 300 2nd Sunday address 307 DAYS OF THE WEEK 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th Tuesday 302 309 316 323 330 Wednesday 303 310 317 324 331 Thursday 304 311 318 325 332 Friday 305 312 319 326 333 Saturday 306 313 320 327 334 Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A et Walking odes Description You can assign Walking TRS Codes for each extension Operation To set Walking TRS Codes using either a large display or small display phone Action Result page 75 1 If not already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main tenance mode S
7. 22 Attendant Groups s s eden gee ek eee eee Oe ee d 22 Automatic Call Distributor 0 0 2 eee 23 Automatic Route Selection 24 Automatic Trunk to Trunk 25 Background Music MOH Separation 25 Battery Backup le ee 25 Building Block Expansion Capability 26 Built In Voice Processing Unit 020 c eee eee eee 26 Call Progress FOIS sica a ed oe rawr a 27 wend hee eee UNE RR eS 28 Centrex PBX Compatibility llle 28 Cl ss OF ServiCQ inscia ss exon om moe amp eerie one el LR DR OU RE el we ees 29 Class of Service Trunk Tie llle es 29 Class of Service Ext Ext Restriction llle 30 Class of Service Extension 30 Class of Service Trunk to Trunk Restriction 32 CO RINGING Types i i a bh ce ea Bn 32 Direct Inward Dial Ringing x x sch hone tho wie eU wean eeu leery 32 DirectIn Line Ringing 655 29 20 sb LM dara A au A MAU af 33 Direct Inward System Access Ringing 00 cece eee eee ee 33 Multiple Ringing ics ate dus aise ote a SRS a
8. 3 Replace the handset Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Message Wait set cancel e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Priority Message Wait set cancel e FFI 2 Dial Plan e Extension COS Considerations System has priority message waiting for 3rd party voice mail See Voice Mail Integration Third Party on page 69 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 279 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Paging CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements Internal pages are made via the System s key telephone speakers External pages are made through the speakers of an external paging system connected to the System Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet Me Answer feature Operation To make a page Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Group Paging code default 3 Enter the number of the desired Paging group 0 9 4 Make your announcement 5 Replace the handset Meet Me Answer To answer a page using Meet Me Answer Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Meet Me Answer code default Connected to specified party Hardware Requirements e External relays amplifier and speakers are requir
9. If you want to check the next PSD number press HOLD key Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To delete a PSD number Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone A Press the PROG key B Press the AUTO key OR A Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 Press the HOLD key Cleared Spd Dial displays Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF8 1 PSD Numbers 180 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features e FF8 1 PSD Names Considerations PSD number can be dialed from One Touch keys For additional information see One Touch Keys on page 173 e Storing a new number erases any previously stored data Ifthe called party s number and name are stored in the PSD code that information appears on the display when you use the speed dial code e Speed dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters The following table reflects which keys to use To indicate Enter Press Shown on Display Digit or character 0 1 9 yes unless preceded by AUTO 2 see below Intercom Level AUTO no MCO Code AUTO 0 no Pause REDIAL no DP DTMF Code AUTO no SSD Code AUTO NN N no Hyphen PROG Dis
10. See eee we PATERET ee Re ee ee See 44 ISDN PRI S Point Interface nes tea REPRE eee th ete ates 45 Flexible Numbering Platten oes os aati ex end Cates See a E 45 Free Slo os viue tei ike Kee dd Re Ee Ew Reet 46 H nting GlOUDS cuc doe ace bie oO na edel docu arce Edo 46 Pilot Terminal Hunt Group av eee vip xci to nS VE One edt ns ets 46 Pilot Distributed Hunt Group EG RR RE Seale es ES AES REN WX x Eds 47 Switch Back eer n9 EE RICE FR Ge 47 Circular Ted NF MAC p i ct house doas Ceres co s e Do C actas 47 Next ExtensiorvHunt Groups RR E RE eR NEN RR 47 Internal Hold Tone 2 eee ee ew cee Oe ewe eee eae ee 48 tenant Group sed EY dme ux E RE ke odes 48 Memory Backup ick ay RE RYE WEE CREER WE EE Penivx aed daas 49 MUSIC ONFHOIG dead d aede ka vai d a acd aca ee Reprise cca E 50 Name Assignments Rd hah ERR ER De 50 Extension Name Assignments 51 Speed Dial Name Assignments 0000 ete ees 54 Network Facilities 5 5 2222 ice usan aur yy n hk Ra 56 Network Call Transtfer urbe EX umi uU ume Ru ex S Ed P 57 Network Extension 220 240 tto 59 208856 E SV e medien ehe 57 Network Paging ss wx sek xs EY ee A MEE eee Ea Wee K AR sete Ea 57 Network Call Routing oo di s wee as io c
11. 11 Press the HOLD key when finished Next SSD bin number displays 12 Toenter another speed dial name press the CONF key and repeat steps 5 11 SSD SSD NO gt NAME displays Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations PSD names can contain a maximum of 7 characters SSD names can contain a maximum of 16 characters e The ability to make extension name assignments is allowed restricted to anyone with a Class of Service COS that allows access to User Maintenance features See Chapter 4 User Maintenance of this document Network Facilities Description The System supports networking facilities such as e Networking extension calling e Network paging e Network call transfer e Tandem calling 56 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features For more information on System Networking see the System Networking Reference Manual Network Call Transfer Network Call Transfer allows a call at an extension to be transferred to another extension in the network Network Extension Calling Network Extension Calling allows you to reach an extension on another PBX Based on the number you dial the System network routes the call automatically Network Paging Network Paging allows users on one System to page on another System when the appropriate Class of Service COS allows
12. 3 Complete the call and replace the handset To use Specified Group Pickup Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Specified Group Pickup code default 703 3 Enter the number of the call pickup group 01 72 where the call is ringing 4 Complete the call and replace the handset Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 02 Intercom Voice Call Pickup e FFI 2 Dial Plan e Call Pickup Group Assignment Considerations e Extension Group Pickup 12 cabinet maximum 72 group 6 cabinet configuration Extension Direct Pickup Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialing the number of the ringing extension 264 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features Operation To use Extension Direct Pickup Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code default 704 Dial the number of the ringing extension Spes Complete the call and replace the handset Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF1 0 02 Intercom Voice Call Pickup FF1 2 Dial Plan Considerations N A Trunk Group Pickup Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO incoming trunk group Operation To use T
13. CO TALK TRK ZXX displays where XX line number Connected to parked call 128 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI System Extension Park Hold Recall Timer Considerations e You cannot park more than one call at a time e Call Park fucntions can be assigned to FF keys see Flexible Function Keys on page 152 No more than one Call Park Answer key may be assigned to a single telephone e A Call Park Answer key may not be assigned to the EM 24 DSS 72 console e facallis parked by Call Park key the LED flashes LCD softkeys are also available for Call Park e Once a call is parked it cannot be accessed by the CO line key or direct CO access similar to exclusive hold e calls are on hold and the last call is parked the other call is then considered the last held call If a transfer is performed the remaining held call would be the call transferred not the parked call Call Pickup CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 AII Versions Description The System allows the following types of call pickup e Extension Group Pickup e Extension Direct Pickup e Trunk Group Pickup e Trunk Direct Pickup Extension Group Pickup Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call within your extension pickup group or in a different pickup group without having
14. 232 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Operation To leave a message waiting indication Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number Ring or busy tone 3 While the telephone is still ringing or when you hear the busy tone enter the Message Wait Set code default 4 4 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Message lamp flashes at called extension To answer a message waiting indication callback Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Message Wait Callback code default 6 Telephone automatically dials exten sion that sent message waiting indica tion Message lamp goes off when your call is answered To cancel a Callback Message Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Callback Request Cancel code default 5 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Message lamp goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Message Wait set cancel e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Priority Message Wait set cancel e FFI 2 Dial Plan FF3 Extension COS Considerations The System has priority message waiting for 3rd
15. Birmingham 205 55X XXXX 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 311 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation Figure A 10 Example Carrier C Simplified WATS Service Bands for Atlanta In this very simplified WATS example the higher the Out WATS band the longer distance the call and therefore the higher cost the call However calls using Out WATS are always less expensive than other long distance choices except for the FX line calls to Birming ham Note that if alternative carriers were less expensive for some areas than the Out WATS service then the area codes would have to be considered in choosing the route 312 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Figure A 11 Example Foreign Exchange Lines From Atlanta to Birmingham Birmingham Atlanta Area Code ES Area Codes 205 404 and 770 In this case we have two Foreign Exchange FX lines to a Birmingham Central Office Exchange Using these lines are like dialing directly from the Birmingham exchange We pay a flat fee for the FX line There is no additional charge for calls to Birmingham For this example there are three office exchange numbers in Birmingham 555 556 and 557 that we want to be able to call that are local calls There are no other exchanges that begin with 55X Implementation The configuration of this system is described in the following steps 1
16. Press the HOLD key Enter Index displays Enter the SSD Index number 1 2 Press the HOLD key A B C D E F XXX displays where XXX SSD bin number Enter the SSD Index name If using a large display phone press the soft key next to the desired row of letters See Example 1 on page 79 If using small display phone press the appropriate one touch key See Example 2 on page 80 Note Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data Use the bottom row of FF Keys to select a single letter See Example 1 Large display phone on page 79 See Example 2 Small display phone on page 80 Notes Press the key to erase a single entry Press the ff key to enter a space Repeat steps 9 10 as many times as necessary to enter the desired SSD name Note Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next SSD index number displays set additional SSD index names press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired SSD Desired SSD index number displays Repeat steps 9 13 until all SSD indexes are entered Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode Enter SSD displays To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key OR To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF key 81 User MAINT displays OR ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements
17. For your extension enter 722 For another extension enter 742 3 If setting Call Forwarding for another extension dial the number of the extension whose calls you want to forward 4 Enter the destination number If forwarding to another extension dial the extension number If forwarding to an outside number press the key then enter the SSD bin number Note Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programed into speed dialing For information see Speed Dialing on page 179 5 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 121 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation To cancel Call Forwarding Busy Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 732 For another extension enter 752 3 If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension dial the extension number 4 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Call Forwarding No Answer When Call Forwarding No Answer is set a call will ring until the Call Forward No Answer timer expires When the timer expires the unanswered call is forwarded Operation To set Call Forwarding No Answer Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2
18. 120 You can assign Caller ID Call Logging to extensions The system is liminted to 20 call logging extensions per cabinet as follows 1 106 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance Operation To set a Caller ID Logging Extensions using either a large display or small display phone Action Result 1 Ifnot already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main 81 tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on User MAINT displays page 75 2 At the 81 level enter 10 3 Press the HOLD key 8110 CID Logging EXT displays 4 Press the HOLD key CID Logging displays 5 Enter log control number 6 Press the HOLD key 7 Dial the extension number 8 Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next log control displays 9 To set CID Log for additional extensions press the volume up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired Extension 10 Repeat steps 6 8 until all extension are entered 11 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode 12 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 OR User MAINT displays To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF OR key ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 107 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section
19. 4 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Contents Trunk Access Groups io Ex pba eae Reet bude wae 66 Virtual Port PORC Ceased ae VES Ee Se bee whan et RAL Se 67 Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension llle 67 Virtual Port used tor Floating Hold suede esac ed gad 67 Voice Mail Integration Third 68 Answer Supervision for Voice Mail 0000 eee ee eee 68 Call Forward ID Code for Voice 68 DID DNIS DDI Voice Mail ID Code 2 0 00 0c 69 High Priority Message Waiting llle 70 Message Key ID GOde i gos E Eae Poet Lr s ee 70 Voice Mail Transfer Key eo aca te ho D sews MORBO HERES Aha eee se see d beat 71 Chapter 4 User Maintenance 73 t jigoto V1 HORA EMT 74 About User Programming EE eee xa ee DER REX 74 Set System Date Time Day 75 Set Personal Speed Dial 76 Set Personal Speed Dial 77 Set System Speed Dial Numbers 82 Set System Speed Dial 5 83 Set System Speed Dial
20. N A Set Day of Week Mode Description For a description of Automatic Day Night System Mode see Automatic Day Night Mode on page 39 The System allows you to specify up to 3 mode patterns This menu item determines which pattern to follow for a given week day in the month i e first Monday second Monday etc Some bushiness may have special operating hours based on the day of the month For instance a company may work half days on the second Saturday of each month 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 101 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Operation To set the Day of Week Modes Action Result If not already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on page 75 81 User MAINT displays 2 At the 81 level enter 07 3 Press the HOLD key 8107 System Mode displays 4 Enter 3 5 Press the HOLD key 3 D of Week PTN displays 6 Press the HOLD key 300 1st SUN Pattern displays Enter pattern 0 no pattern 1 pattern 1 2 pattern 2 3 pattern 3 for the first Sunday Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next Day of Week mode displays To set additional Day of Week modes press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired mode Desired Day of Week mode displays
21. Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance b Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row DIGITAL MODE END C O gt A B C D E MO ez 55 es es C DJ C J IL J lm a j To enter 0 a Press the third one touch key from the left on the top row b Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row DIGITAL MODE END Co m nop qar 2 Cor pe 19 1 eS is C JJC os 2 as deb Mn Sex es C9 C5 CIO C I AC Jim Jiu j e gt a gt 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 81 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Set System Speed Dial Numbers Description For a description of System Speed Dial SSD see System Speed Dial on page 181 for a Digital Key Telephone System Speed Dial on page 240 for a Digital Single Line Telephone DSLT and System Speed Dial on page 283 for a Single Line Telephone SLT Operation To set SSD numbers Action Result 1 Ifnot already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main 81 tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode
22. The fixed MUTE key works both for handset mute and microphone mute But only 44 Series phones have the fixed MUTE key so others must assign an FF key as a MUTE key 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 169 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation onitor CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Offhook Monitor lets you put a call on speaker while the handset is offhook You can still communicate with the other party via the handset but you will also be able to hear the other party on the phone s speaker The other party can only hear what is transmitted through your handset however because audio is not transmitted through your microphone Operation To put a call on speaker using the Offhook Monitor Action Result 1 During a handset call press the ON OFF key Other party is audible through speaker and handset Phone s microphone is mute 2 To take a caller off speaker disable Offhook Monitor but continue the call via the handset press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming e FFI 0 01 Monitor Considerations e Offhook Monitor is available on 44 Series phones only e Offhook Monitor can be disabled system wide Offhook Signaling CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 AII Versions Description Offhook Signaling sends a tone to a busy extension to indicate that another CO call has arrived or a
23. The same Walking Class of Service code can be used on more than one extension Walking Class of Service mode is kept until the user goes on hook ARS and TRS dialing privileges follow the Walking Class of Service Before entering a new Walking COS code you must first clear the existing code When Walking COS is used Wxxxx where xxxx is the user s extension number appears in SMDR 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 289 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation 290 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Introduction This appendix provides an overview of the Toll Restriction Service TRS and Automatic Route Selection ARS features that are available with the DBS 576 PBX TRS provides the ability to block selected outgoing calls while allowing others ARS automatically finds the lowest cost way to send out a call This feature is sometimes called Least Cost Routing LCR With the DBS 576 system it is possible to utilize TRS without ARS called TRS or to utilize both TRS and ARS together called ARS TRS or simply ARS Once TRS is set up itis automatic Whenever a call is originated the TRS tables are checked to see if the call is restricted or not This restriction is based on the originator and the number dialed Separate TRS classes are assigned for Day mode and Night mode ARS operates when
24. 1100 1102 1104 1106 1108 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1101 1110 1103 1105 1107 1109 Start Time HHMM 1111 1113 1115 1117 1119 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1112 1121 1114 1116 1118 1120 Start Time HHMM 1122 1124 1126 1128 1130 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1123 1132 1125 1127 1129 1131 Start Time HHMM 1133 1135 1137 1139 1141 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 1134 1136 1138 1140 1142 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 97 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation 8107 1 1000 1219 Hold MMDD or HHMM or 0 5 Hold Special Day 14 Special Day 15 Special Day 16 Special Day 17 VALUES MMDD or 0 5 Date MMDD 1st MODE 1143 ADDRESS NOs 1000 1219 2nd MODE MODES 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE Start Time HHMM 1144 1146 1148 1150 1152 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1145 1154 1147 1149 1151 1153 Start
25. Direct Inward Dialing DID Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS Direct Dial Inward DDI Direct Inward System Access DISA Extension calls Private network attendant calls Call forward incoming Call forwarded to Attendant Hunt Group nternal Ho one Description If a Music on Hold MOH sound source is unavailable a periodic hold tone generated internally in the System can be provided to a caller For more information see Music on Hold on page 50 Hardware Hequirements e N A Related Programming e FFI MOH Assignment Considerations N A MCO Tenant Group Description When the System is configured for tenant operation MCO Tenant Group determines which trunks groups are used for incoming and outgoing calls 48 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Each MCO trunk group is assigned to an MCO tenant group for incoming calls and for outgoing calls By default Trunk Group 1 is assigned to MCO Tenant Group 1 Trunk Group 2 is assigned to MCO Tenant Group 2 etc for both incoming and outgoing calls For outgoing calls each tenant group has 5 auto trunk selections available By default the first auto trunk selection is seized by entering 9 the second by entering 81 etc The number of MCO tenant groups available depends on the number of ports in the system as follows e 96 port system 1 to 12 MCO tenant groups 192 por
26. Hardware Hequirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Call Progress Tones Description The System supplies a full array of call progress tones These tones provide audible indications of the status of calls and include dial tone busy tone ringback tone error tone confirmation tone and splash tone The complete specification for these tones may be found in Section 300 Installation In addition to call progress tones Direct Station Select DSS LEDs and the display provide additional indication of the status of calls Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 27 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Considerations N A Caller ID Description A properly equipped DBS 576 supports Caller ID a service offered by the network telephone service provider The CO sends calling number information to the DBS 576 after the first ring Users who have display telephones can see Caller ID information as incoming calls ring at their extension and can have access to previous calls via the Caller ID Call Log feature The Caller ID number is recorded in SMDR Hardware Requirements e Loop start trunk card VB 44510 e Caller ID circuit card VB 44513 Related Programming e FF2 0 Caller ID e FF2 0 Caller ID Ring Control e FF3 0 Call Duration Display Considerations e ISDN PRI T Point can get calling party i
27. N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 45 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Free Slot Description Each cabinet in the System contains 12 free universal slots These slots can be used for trunk cards extension cards or certain option cards Some circuit cards such as the Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI card occupy more that one slot Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A Hunting Groups Description Hunting allows calls to be automatically transferred among a preselected group of phones If a phone is busy or there is no answer in a set amount of time the call will hunt to the next phone in the hunt group A phone assigned to a hunt group is called a member Up to 20 members can be assigned to a hunt group Up to 12 hunt groups are available per cabinet Several methods of station hunting are available Some methods require use of a pilot number a fictitious extension number while others start by a direct call to a hunt group member The System supports the following hunting groups e Pilot Terminal Hunt Group e Pilot Distributed Hunt Group e Switch Back Hunt Group e Circular Hunt Group e Next Extension Hunt Group Pilot Terminal Hunt Group Pilot Terminal Hunt Group directs calls to a pilot number The System begins with the first member and hunts through the group for the first availab
28. Operation Operation To park a call on this extension Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Current call on hold CO HOLD displays where trunk number 2 Enter the Call Park Hold access code default 771 or press PARK HOLD key Park Hold displays 3 If necessary page the party that needs to retrieve the call To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Call Park Answer Other Ext access code default 773 3 Dialthe number of the extension that parked the call CO TALK TRK displays where XX line number Connected to parked call To park a call at another extension Action Result 1 Press the HOLD key Current call on hold CO HOLD displays where XX trunk number 2 Enter the Call Park Transfer access code default 774 3 Dialthe extension number to receive the parked call Park ext displays on lower display 4 If necessary page the party that needs to retrieve the call To retrieve a transfered call park Action Result 1 Atthe extension with the transfered park call lift the hand set or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter Call Park Answer Self access code default 772
29. Revised 6 11 98 203 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation This feature works with Station Message Detail Recording SMDR During a phone call a station user can silently enter an accounting or client billing code The entered Code will display on the phone s LCD as it s dialed so the user can tell it s being registered Then later the SMDR reports will show the Code dialed for each call and even sort the report by these Codes There are two different types of account codes you can use in the DBS 576 Non Verified Account Codes Non Verified Codes aren t checked by the system for validity the user can enter anything from 1 10 digits long Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced Account Codes the user must enter a code for every call or voluntary Account Codes the user can enter a code but doesn t have to for each call Non Verified Account Codes can be assigned to incoming and or outgoing calls For incoming calls the user can enter the Code anytime during the call For outgoing calls the user either enters the Code before accessing an outside line for forced Codes or anytime during the call for voluntary Codes Verified Account Codes Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a 4 digit code that has been preprogrammed into an Account Code Table It is possible to enter up to 10 digits for a Verified Account Code however only the first 4 digits will be used to verify the code
30. Revised 6 11 98 93 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Action Result 10 Press the HOLD key 1002 S Day 01 1 Mode displays key 11 Enter the desired mode for Special Day 0 None 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH 12 Press the HOLD key Next Special Day mode displays mode 13 To set additional Special Day modes press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired 14 Repeat steps 7 13 until all Special Day modes are set Up to 20 special days may be entered Note The entry positions are listed in Table 10 15 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode 1 Mode Special Day displays OR key 16 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF 81 OR User MAINT displays ON OFF LED goes off Table 10 Special Day Start Time Mode addresses amp values 8107 1 1000 1219 Hold MMDD or HHMM or 0 5 Hold VALUES ADDRESS NOs 1000 1219 MMDD HHMM or 0 5 MODES 1st MODE 2nd MODE 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE Date 1000 Special Day 1 MMDD Start Time 1001 1003 1005 1007 1009 HHMM Mode 0 5 1002 1004 1006 1008 1010 0 None 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 94 DBS 576
31. e An SLT that will be connected to the PFU Related Programming e N A Considerations e Up to four SLTS can be connected to one PFU e For added protection against power outages backup batteries can be installed in the System Backup batteries provide full telephone service and system features to all System extensions for a limited amount of time With maximum traffic the backup batteries last up to 30 minutes ower On Maintenance Description The System allows you to change most circuit cards programming and many other maintenance features while the System is powered on and operating Very few operations require the System to be powered down or out of service The System therefore continues to operate without interruption for most maintenance functions A limited number of items such as the replacement of some common control circuit cards requires the system to be powered down Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A 58 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Programming Devices Description The dealer may program the System either by using A digital key telephone equipped with display e A PC Based Customizing Tool Telephone Programming The System can be fully programmed from an extension telephone equipped with 12 FF keys and a display While major system configuration changes may be more easily performed usi
32. either no system speed dials or limit the range of SSDs 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 65 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation TRS can restrict the use of the star or pound digits on a TRS class basis The following calling restrictions are also available Forced ARS Restriction The ARS feature controls outside calls Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming N A Considerations dialing restrictions included in this feature help prevent unauthorized outgoing calls It is possible however to program your System to allow SSD to override TRS e For more information on ARS TRS see the ARS TRS Reference Manual Trunk Access Groups Description Trunks can be placed in trunk groups When a trunk group is accessed the System automatically selects an open trunk from the group Operation To access a trunk group Action Result Enter a trunk access code default trunk group access codes are 9 or 81 84 2 Dial phone number Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 3 MCO Access Considerations e Trunks can only appear in one trunk group e If Automatic Call Routing is enabled the MCO access code 9 by default automatically accesses the Automatic Route Selection ARS features 66 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Virtual Port Des
33. Large Display Phone 146 Small Display Phone 147 Changing the Display Contrast 147 Do Not Disturb 148 DP to DTMF Signal Conversion 150 DSS 72 Console 150 EM 24 Console 151 Flash 151 Flexible Function Keys 152 Handsfree Answerback 157 Handsfree Operation 158 Headset Operation 159 Hot Dial Pad 160 Hot Line 160 Intercom Calling 161 Last Number Redial 162 Line Appearances 163 DSS BLF Appearances 163 Direct Line Appearances 165 Multi CO MCO Appearances 165 Message Key 166 Message Waiting Callback 167 Mute Function 169 Offhook Monitor 170 Offhook Signaling 170 Offhook Voice Announce 171 One Touch Keys 173 Onhook Dialing 175 Paging 176 Meet Me Answer 177 Reset Call 177 Ringing Line Preference 178 Speed Dialing 179 Personal Speed Dial 179 System Speed Dial 181 Speed Dial Linking 183 Speed Dial Name Assignments 185 110 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Topic Page Timed Reminder Call 189 Trunk Access 190 CO Line Key Trunk Access 191 Direct Trunk Access 192 MCO Line Preference 192 MCO Trunk Access 192 Trunk Queuing 194 Variable Mode 195 Voice Recognition 197 Volume Control 197 Walking TRS Class of Service 198 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 111 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Key Telephone As an example of a key telephone Figure 2 illustrates the
34. Related Programming e FF1 0 02 Intercom Voice Call Pickup e FFI 2 Dial Plan e FF5 6 Call Pickup Group Assignment Considerations e Extension Group Pickup 12 cabinet maximum 72 group 6 cabinet configuration Extension Direct Pickup Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialing the number of the ringing extension Operation To use Extension Direct Pickup Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code default 704 Dial the number of the ringing extension VES Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 02 Intercom Voice Call Pickup e FFI 2 Dial Plan 220 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Considerations N A Trunk Group Pickup Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO incoming trunk group Operation To use Trunk Group Pickup Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code default 709 3 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 3 MCO Inbound Trunk Group Member
35. Section 700 Operation Fixed Feature Code Default Flexible Feature Code Feature Description additional digits to program into if not listed must use Fixed Feature key Code Call Forward No Answer Set 13 743 from another extension Call Forward No Answer Clear 4 753 from another extension Call Forward Busy Set 72 Extension 0 9999 722 Extension 0 9999 Call Forward Busy Clear 15 732 Extension 0 9999 Call Forward Busy Set from 16 742 another extension Call Forward Busy Clear from 17 752 another extension DND Set Clear 18 720 DND Set from Attendant 19 740 DND Clear from Attendant 20 750 Call Forward All Busy No Answer 221 Tik DND Clear i i Alarm Set 22 3 Alarm Clear 23 39 BGM On Off 24 30 Day 1 Night Toggle 25 760 Day 2 26 761 Night 1 27 762 Night 2 for 2 Way VM 28 763 Paging 29 Page Group No Zone No Meet Me Answer 30 THE Call Pickup Group AIl Calls 3 701 Call Pickup Group CO Calls Only 32 702 Call Pickup Group designated pick up a call in another Pickup 33 Call Pickup Grp 1 99 703 Group Direct Call Pickup 73 Extension 0 9999 704 CO Trunk Call Pickup 34 0 Headset Mode On Off 35 Conference Key 36 Transfer Key 37 Program Key 38 Recall Flash Key 39 PSD Name Assignment 40 Ext Directory Name Assignment 41 Speed Dial Directory
36. This can be used like a system park feature Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 67 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Voice Mail Integration Third Party Description The System supports third party Voice Mail systems with features such as e Answer Supervision for Voice Mail e Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail e DID DNIS DDI ID Code for Voice Mail High Priority Message Waiting e Message Key ID Code Answer Supervision for Voice Mail Description This feature allows the DBS 576 to send an answer signal to third party Voice Mail systems Without this feature a third party Voice Mail cannot receive a signal indicating that a DBS DBS 576 extension has answered In other words to determine that the extension has answered the Voice Mail system would have to wait until the extension stops receiving ringback tone As a result waiting for the ringback to stop often delays connection times for calls from Voice Mail to extensions By sending an answer signal this feature provides quicker response time between the DBS 576 and the Voice Mail system Hardware Requirements e AEC Port Related Programming e FF1 023 Voice Mail Answer Supervision ID Code e FF3 0 SLT Voice Mail Connection e FFI 101 DTMF ON OFF Pattern 2 Considerations e digits used for the answer signal code are determined by the requ
37. This information may be referenced by technicians or owners of the System Software version information for systems shipped with this document CPC Model Software Version Organization This manual contains detailed descriptions of features The feature descriptions are organized according to the following categories Feature Categories Description System Features System Features are either available on a system wide basis or aid in the overall administration of the System User Maintenance User Maintenance Features are used by the end user to maintain the System These items include setting time and date Personal Speed Dial PSD numbers and names System Speed Dial SSD numbers and names extension names Verified ID codes Call Forward ID codes for Voice Mail Message Key ID codes Mode schedule Special Day mode Excep tion Day mode and Day of Week mode Key Telephone Features Key Telephone Features are available to System Key phones System Key phones are proprietary digital sets that provide feature access through a combina tion of feature keys and access codes Digital Single Line Tele phone DSLT Features DSLT Features are available to Digital Single Line Telephones DSLTs provide digital audio quality and limited feature key access in a single line set Single Line Telephone SLT Features SLT Features are available to industry standard 2500 sets
38. USA Revised 6 1 1 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance 8107 1 1000 1219 Hold MMDD or HHMM or 0 5 Hold Special Day 2 Special Day 3 Special Day 4 Special Day 5 VALUES MMDD or 0 5 Date MMDD 1st MODE 1011 ADDRESS NOs 1000 1219 2nd MODE MODES 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE Start Time HHMM 1012 1014 1016 1018 1020 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1013 1022 1015 1017 1019 1021 Start Time HHMM 1023 1025 1027 1029 1031 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1024 1033 1026 1028 1030 1032 Start Time HHMM 1034 1036 1038 1040 1042 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1035 1044 1037 1039 1041 1043 Start Time HHMM 1045 1047 1049 1051 1053 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 1046 1048 1050 1052 1054 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 95 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation 8107 1 1000 1219 Hold MMDD or HHMM or 0 5 Hold Special Day 6 Special Day 7 Special Day 8
39. key to enter a space Repeat steps 8 9 as many times as necessary to enter the desired SSD name Note Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry Press the HOLD key when finished Next SSD bin number displays Toenter another speed dial name press the CONF key and repeat steps 5 11 SSD NO gt SSD NAME displays Example 1 Large display phone To enter D a Press the first soft key on the top left 186 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features b Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row gt ABCDEF abcdef lt gt e GHIJKL ghijkl MNOPQR C STUVWX stuvwx Co C YZ yz amp sp MSG CONF MENU PREV NEXT PROG J C 3246 f Jt jla m j To enter 0 a Press the third soft key from the top right b Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row Co ABCDEF abcdef C2 GHIJKL ghijkl C MNOPQR mnopqgr C co STUVWX stuvwx CoO yz amp sp x MSG CONF MENU PREV NEXT PROG C 3 J J I 2 2 a 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 187 Chapter 5 Key T
40. on User MAINT displays page 75 2 At the 81 level enter 02 3 Press the HOLD key 8102 SSD Assignment displays 4 Press the HOLD key 0 SSD Number displays 5 Press the HOLD key Enter SSD displays 6 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 000 799 7 Press the HOLD key SSDXXX XXX displays where XXX SSD bin number 8 Enter the SSD digits to be dialed Note Press the FLASH key to clear an entry or any exist ing data 9 Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next SSD bin number displays 10 To set additional SSD numbers press the volume up Desired SSD bin number displays down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired SSD 11 Repeat steps 8 10 until all SSDs are entered 12 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 OR User MAINT displays To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF OR key ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A 82 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance Considerations N A Set System Speed Dial Names Description For a description of System Speed Dial SSD see System Speed Dial on page 181 for a Digital Key Telephone System Speed Dial on page 240 for a Digital Single Line Telephone DSLT and System Speed Dial on page 283 for a Single Line Telephone SLT Operation To set SSD names us
41. the system would issue a warning tone to the user before connecting the trunk to allow the caller to hang up before using the higher cost trunk This process is repeated if necessary for the Priority 3 Long Distance Carrier B and then Priority 4 Long Distance Carrier A Table A 16 Example Route List Table Route List Table Route List Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Priority 5 Pattern 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 9 2 9 a D p 3 m E p 1 500 Z E E D 5 2 a 5 E m amp E Z 5 2 E 2 lt lt lt lt lt z 1 4 1 2 NO 3 3 NO 2 3 No FX WATS Night Day 2 4 1 5 2 NO 2 3 NO 3 FX WATS Day Night 3 2 3 3 NO 2 3 NO WATS Night Day 4 5 2 2 3 NO 3 3 NO WATS Day Night 5 3 2 2 3 NO Night Day 5 2 2 3 3 NO Day Night 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 323 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation 9 In this example there are only 5 route patterns needed The first three use the same trunks to the local CO The first pattern does not modify the dialed digits The second pattern uses the Digit Modify Pattern to add the Equal Access Code prefix for Long Distance Carrier A preferred in the day time The third pattern uses the Digit Modify Pattern to add the Equal Access Code prefix for Long Distance Carrier B preferred at night and on wee
42. 04 Trunk COS Paging FF1 2 Dial Plan FF2 Trunk COS FF3 Extension COS Considerations You can assign the paging access code to a one touch or FF key If an external paging system has been connected pages can be made to paging groups 0 9 through the external speakers Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0 9 An extension can belong to more than one paging group Only one page may be performed at a time If you attempt to make a page while another extension is paging you will receive a busy signal unless your system allows Paging Override Reset Call CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description If you dial a busy extension the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply pressing the last digit of the new extension number 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 177 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Operation To use Reset Call to dial another extension after a busy extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial an extension number Busy tone 3 Dial the last digit of the next extension number Example You dial extension 213 but it is busy To dial extension 214 enter 4 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan Considerations e The second extension called using the Reset Call feature must have the same number of digi
43. 2 Dial Plan Considerations Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding DND activated For example extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded If forwarding to an outside number the destination number must be pre programmed into a System Speed Dial SSD code Call Forwarding Busy and Call Forwarding No Answer can both be set at the same time You can set Call Forwarding All Calls while Call Forwarding No Answer and or Call Forwarding Busy are set Canceling one mode only affects that mode however the other modes will remain set until canceled individually An auto camp on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination A manual camp on to a busy extension will not forward If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set calls immediately forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 Call Hold CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The system provides the following types of Call Hold System Hold Floating Hold Exclusive Hold Broker s Hold Call Park Station System Hold You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold You can retrieve a call placed on System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call 214 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSL
44. 2 Y 3 General Office Night 2 1 Y 4 Attendant Group Night Retail Floor Day Night Warehouse Day Night 1 0 Y 5 Calls are screened by examining the initial digits dialed A is available as a wild card This represents any single digit 1 to 9 When prefix dial is being considered by the system the system looks for the longest exact match first The system considers a wildcard last 318 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Calls are screened by first considering the initial digits dialed In this case the first Prefix Dialed entry is a 1 This will look at any number that starts with 1 A is available as a wild card This represents any single digit 1 9 When prefix dial is being considered by the system the system looks for the longest exact match first The system considers a wildcard last For instance 911 is considered before 11 or even Notice also in this example there are multiple entries that begin with 9 If the leading digits needed are to determine the handling of the call then additional digits can be considered by entering a Prefix ID that references entries in the Analyze Digits Table Otherwise the Prefix ID is left blank and the additional items are considered In this example we cross reference Prefix ID 1 in the Analyze Digits table for any dialed number that begins with 1 and Prefix ID 2 for any dialed numbe
45. 500 Prefix ID In this case Prefix ID 1 links calls that have a dialed prefix of 1 Several entries are made to determine the restriction TRS level and the Route Type The call originator must have a Origination TRS Level exceeding for the call to be allowed If any other analyze digits are dialed this would be covered by the three wildcards In this case the call originator must have a TRS level exceeding 2 for the call to be allowed Digits to Analyze in addition to the leading digits Number of Following Digits Restriction TRS Level Any Origination TRS at this level or below will be restricted Route Type Route Table 0 Route List 1 Time List 2 Route Pattern Number Route Table 1 200 Route List 1 100 or Time List 1 50 20555 120555XXXXX Time List 2 INXX976XXXX Time List 2 5551212 1NXX5551212 Route Table 0 800 1800XXXXXXX Route Table 0 888 1888XXXXXXX Route Table 0 900 1900XXXXXXX Route Table 0 ek INXXXXXX Time List 2 KKK Collect Call Time List 2 320 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation 7 If call routing varies by day of week or special day then separate time lists must be prepared In this example weekday call routing varies from weekends and holidays Ther
46. 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To initiate Handsfree Operation Action Result 1 Press the ON OFF key Phone is offhook with access to full range of calling features Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A Headset Operation CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Headset Operation allows you to handle calls with a headset instead of with the handset or speakerphone Operation To answer calls using the Headset Operation Note If Headset mode is already on the following procedure turns it off If Headset mode is off this procedure turns it on Action Result Pick up the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Press the PROG key Enter 90 for Headset mode zs Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements A headset must be installed Related Programming FF1 0 3 Extension COS Dial Tone Stop 1 2 Dial Plan FF3 Extension COS 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 159 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Considerations e Intercom Dial Tone is enabled disabled regardless of Headset mode per programming for the Extension Class of Service COS Hot Dial Pad CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 1 3 Description The dial pad on digital key phones can be des
47. 700 Operation 108 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features This chapter describes Key telephone features Key telephones are proprietary digital phones that provide feature access through a combination of feature keys and access codes This chapter covers the following topics Topic Page Key Telephone 112 Account Codes 112 Non Verified Account Codes 113 Verified Account Codes 114 Attendant Group Calls 115 Auto Repeat Dial 116 Background Music 116 Busy Override 117 Callback Request 119 Call Forwarding 120 Call Forwarding All Calls 120 Call Forwarding Busy 121 Call Forwarding No Answer 122 Call Forwarding All Calls and Do Not Disturb 123 Call Hold 124 System Hold 124 Floating Hold 125 Exclusive Hold 126 Broker s Hold 127 Call Park 127 Call Pickup 129 Extension Group Pickup 129 Extension Direct Pickup 131 Trunk Group Pickup 131 Trunk Direct Pickup 132 Call Transfer 132 Supervised Transfer 132 Unsupervised Transfer 134 Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension 135 Caller ID Call Log 136 Camp on Call Waiting 141 Conference Calls 143 Three Party Conferencing 143 Eight Party Conferencing 144 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 109 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Topic Page Display Information 145
48. 72 134 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension Operation To camp a call onto a busy extension Action Result While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone 2 Dialthe extension number to which the call is to be trans ferred If your extension does not have Auto Camp on activated Camp on tone heard at the called exten enter the Camp on Call Waiting code default 2 sion Complete the transfer f On Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON OFF key If On Hook Transfer is disabled press the PROG key RELEASE key is using DSS 72 Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF1 0 03 Extension COS Onhook Transfer at Ringback FF1 0 03 Extension COS Onhook Transfer at Talk FF1 0 03 Extension COS Onhook Transfer at Camp on FF1 0 03 Extension COS Trunk to trunk On hook Transfer Restriction Considerations If On Hook Transfer is not enabled for the transferring party s Extension Class of Service COS he she must press the PROG or RELEASE key before hanging up to complete the transfer If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires the call will recall to the transferring extension If a Transfer Recall is not answered b
49. 9 Enter the stop date by month two characters and day two characters for Exception Period 1 Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key 10 Press the HOLD key Next Exception Day mode displays 11 To set additional Exception Day modes press the volume Desired Exception Day mode displays up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired mode 12 Repeat steps 7 11 until all Exception Day modes are set Up to 6 exception periods may be specified Note The entry positions are listed in Table 11 on page 101 100 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance Action Result 13 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode 2 Mode Except Day displays 14 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 OR User MAINT displays To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF OR key ON OFF LED goes off Table 11 Exception Days 8107 2 200 211 Hold MMDD Hold EXCEPTION DAYS pt di A 200 Start Exception Day 1 201 End Month Day of Exception Days 202 Start Exception Day 2 Start or End 203 End 204 Start Exception Day 3 205 End 206 Start Exception Day 4 207 End 208 Start Exception Day 5 209 End 210 Start Exception Day 6 211 End Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations
50. 99 and press the right EXEC key and press HOLD 138 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Call Log Operation on a Large Display Key Telephone Operation To view the Call Log Action Result 1 Go off hook or press On Off Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the Call Log feature code default CONF 96 Phone enters call log mode 3 Press the following keys to view the call log Move forward in call log Move back in call log NEXT View the next 5 calls PREV View the previous 5 calls 4 Exit the Call Log by going on hook or by pressing On Off Example Caller ID Call Log Large Display Telephone Call Log Entry Number 01 10 Time and Date blank Answered 08 3q Fri Oct 24 oF Call Calling Party 0 Puy 0 5553678 lt q Calling Number Hung Up Answeredby WM01 2015553678 Someone Else M02 2015554444 O 03 2015553456 O 04 4045554321 O e M05 4045557654 o 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 139 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation To outdial from the Call Log Action Result Go off hook or press On Off Intercom dial tone Dial the Call Log feature code default CONF 96 Phone enters call log mode Press the following keys to view the call log Mov
51. ACGOSS cuti ee Ores e vacca OE RU 286 Direct TrunK ACCESS ote iv Revier vbi eec Voted Ew d od ane td eed ES 286 MCO TRIDIGASOBSS RR oet E PERIERE CERO 286 Trunk Queuing iu sasuke ER Euh hh aca eR Ge ee RS HG OR RC er a 288 Walking TRS Class of Service 289 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 9 Contents Section 700 Operation Chapter 8 ARS and TRS 291 troduction A cio Cod Ur an a esci De ca De ie aon aO a e e oe M Qa Q6 E eae i 291 Detailed Description 0 0 292 TAS 1 oe le ase coe A eal muet eu cp E ais es E ee 292 ARS THS Features 2 0 cote e deeb ee EIER uh p ER ESTO DEBT Tercer NEUE 293 TRS Configuration and Operation 295 TRS Programming Operation Overview 296 Example TRS Configuration uta vet Sacks Saree eee Melee eie ete 298 ARS Configuration and 306 ARS TRS Programming Operation Overview 306 Example ARS Configuration 2332 tuk di erm Ri eee a tok et ES 309 10 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Chapter 1 About This Manual If you are using this manual for a single System make note of its software version in the following table
52. ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation 2 From the User Needs and Tenant Trunk Groups Worksheets TRS levels are determined This list is created by reviewing the different calling needs and assigning the most restrictions to the lowest TRS level and working up to the least restriction level Table A 9 Example Origination TRS Level Plan Originator TRS Level Properties TRS Level 9 No Restriction All long distance calls allowed except special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc Allow 911 North America long distance calls allowed except special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc Allow 911 Local Calls Allowed No long distance or special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc Allow calls to 205 555 XXXX 205 556 XXXX and 205 557 XXXX Allow 911 911 Only No Outside Calling 316 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation 3 From the User Needs and Tenant Trunk Groups Worksheets ARS levels are determined This list is created by reviewing the different calling needs and assigning the least cost access levels to the lowest ARS level and working up to the highest cost ARS level Table A 10 Example Origination ARS Level Plan Originator ARS Level ARS Level Properties 9 Full ARS Access In
53. Assignments 50 Network Facilities 56 Non Blocking Architecture 57 Power Failure Transfer 58 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 2 List of Features Topic Page Power On Maintenance 58 Programming Devices 59 Ringing Modes 59 SSD TRS Override 63 Station Message Detail Recording 63 Station Message Detail Recording 63 Ringing Modes 59 Trunk Access Groups 66 Virtual Port 67 Voice Mail Integration Third Party 68 Table 2 Maintenance Features Topic Page Set System Date Time Day 75 Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers 76 Set Personal Speed Dial Names TI Set System Speed Dial Numbers 82 Set System Speed Dial Names 83 Set Extension Names 86 Set Verified Account Codes 87 Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail 89 Set Message Key ID Code 90 Set Mode Schedule 21 Set Special Day Mode 93 Set Exception Day Mode 99 Set Day of Week Mode 101 Set Walking TRS Codes 103 Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension 104 Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension 105 Set Caller ID Logging Extensions 106 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 15 Chapter 2 List of Features Section 700 Operation Table 3 Extension Features Topic Page Account Codes 112 Att
54. CO line Operation To establish an Eight party Conference Call from the idle status Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone Enter the Eight Party Conference code default 788 Hookflash e pes utbs os Enter a trunk access code or dial the number of the exten sion you wish to add to the call 5 If you entered a trunk access code dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call Otherwise proceed to step 6 6 Hookflash when your call is answered Connected to called party 7 To add additional parties to the call hookflash and repeat steps 3 6 To establish an Eight party Conference Call from your current call Action Result While on a call hookflash to place the current call on hold Current call on hold Enter the Eight Party Conference code default 788 Hookflash suos sae ss Enter a trunk access code or dial the number of the exten sion you wish to add to the call 5 If you entered a trunk access code dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call Otherwise proceed to step 6 6 Hookflash when your call is answered Connected to called party 7 To add additional parties to the call hookflash and repeat steps 3 6 Hardware Requirements 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 271 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation N A Related Programming e F
55. Callback requests from other extensions e Extension number e Extension calling party name e Extension called party status e Trunk call duration e Trunk number e Trunk name Display telephones can also display Personal Speed Dial PSD Directories System Speed Dial SSD Directories and Extension Directories along with various other information such as the Set Cancel status of different features and callback messages from other extensions Examples of 44 Series large and small display phones are shown in the following illustrations 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 145 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Large Display Phone Figure 3 Large Display Main Menu shown in default idle condition BIGITAL 10 40 Thu JAN 14 325 Langford 5 PERSONAL DIAL e e SYSTEM DIAL soft keys CO EXTENSION Se soft keys FUNCTION SYSTEM s FUNCTION EXT KE You can easily access and use many telephone features by pressing the soft key next to the desired Main Menu item These items include Personal Dial Contains PSD numbers To scroll through the PSD Directory press the NEXT or PREV buttons located beneath the display e PSD speed dial numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial directory For information on programming speed dial numbers see Speed Dialing on page 179 System Dial Contains SSD numbers To
56. Description The System provides two methods of intercom calling e Voice Calling Extension calls are connected immediately without a ringing tone e Tone Calling A ringing tone is sent to the called extension Extension Class of Service COS programming determines whether the default for the originating extension is voice or tone calling Regardless of the default you can toggle between voice or tone calling by entering the Tone Voice Call feature code For example if the extension default is tone calling you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone Voice Call feature access code Operation 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 161 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation To make a call using Intercom Calling Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number 3 If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to Dialed number displays make a voice call enter 1 EXT LED lights Or if your extension is set for voice call and you want to make a tone call enter 1 4 Speak when your call is answered 5 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key EXT LED goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Intercom Calling Type e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Voice Call Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Voice Call Receive e Extension C
57. Enter 3 while connected to the door box extension Door unlocks Hardware Requirements e door box requires a Door Box Adaptor VB 43701 Door Box VA 43705 and Door Opener Door openers are not sold by Panasonic however they can be purchased from an electronics dealer e Up to 2 Door Boxes can be connected to a Door Box Adaptor and utilize the same trunk Door Opener can be set to open for 15 seconds 30 seconds one minute e While the Door Opener is functioning call from another Door Box on the same Door Box adaptor cannot be answered Related Programming e N A Considerations e The trunk connected to the Door Box Adaptor must be set to dial pulse DP 42 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Door Box Sensor The sensor is a device that detects when a circuit is opened or closed Sensors can be used to detect events such as the opening of windows or doors When the sensor is tripped a tone sounds at a designated extension Sensors are not sold by Panasonic however they can be purchased separately from an electronics dealer Hardware Requirements sensor is attached to the Door Box Adaptor VB 43701 e Trunk lines connected to the Door Box Adaptor signal the designated extension when the sensor is tripped Related Programming e N A Considerations The trunk connected to the sensor must be a dial pu
58. Exclusive Hold 261 Broker s Hold 261 Call Park 262 Call Pickup 263 Extension Group Pickup 263 Extension Direct Pickup 264 Trunk Group Pickup 265 Trunk Direct Pickup 266 Call Transfer 266 Supervised Transfer 266 Unsupervised Transfer 267 Camp On Call Waiting 268 Conference Calls 270 Three Party Conferencingg 270 Eight Party Conferencing 271 Do Not Disturb DND 272 Flash Send 274 Flash Send 274 Intercom Calling 275 Last Number Redial 276 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 249 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Topic Page Message Waiting Callback 278 Offhook Signaling 276 Offhook Voice Announce 278 Paging 280 Meet Me Answer 280 Reset Call 281 Speed Dialing 281 Personal Speed Dial 282 System Speed Dial 283 Speed Dial Linking 284 Timed Reminder Call 285 Trunk Access 286 Direct Trunk Access 286 MCO Trunk Access 286 Trunk Queuing 286 Walking TRS Class of Service 289 250 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features Account Codes CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times numbers called and outside line numbers used This information is printed for each account on the System Message Detail Recording SMDR record In addition verified account codes may be used to c
59. Features Section 700 Operation To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Outside dial tone Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Trunk Queuing e Extension COS Considerations e Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be canceled e The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make call using the MCO Trunk Access feature Walking TRS Class of Service Walking TRS Class of Service allows an extension user to carry his or her toll restrictions to another phone Before the Walking TRS Class of Service feature can be used a Walking Class of Service code must be entered at your extension before using dialing privileges at another extension Operation To use a Walking Class of Service code Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key of an extension Intercom dial tone other than your own Enter 87 Dial your extension number Enter your Walking Class of Service code 0001 9999 Enter a trunk access code 9 or 81 84 9x ene 0 499 Dial the phone number Walking Class of Service remains in effect until you replace the handset 7 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A 246 DBS 57
60. For additional information see One Touch Keys on page 173 You can also enter a name up to 7 characters for each of the PSD numbers This allows PSD numbers to be confirmed by name rather than by number Operation To assign PSD numbers Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 A Press the PROG key B Press the AUTO key OR A Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 Enter Spd Dial displays Dial the phone number Press the HOLD key Stored Spd Dial displays Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key OY 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 179 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone If necessary access an outside line Outside dial tone Press the AUTO key OR Enter the Speed Dial Originate code default 80 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To check a PSD number Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Press the CONF key C displays Press the AUTO key Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 Programmed data displays
61. Hold allows calls to be placed in a hold orbit position for retrieval elsewhere in the system Floating Hold is most commonly used by the attendant group when they are unable to locate the desired party If the desired party does not answer his her phone the attendant places the caller on Floating Hold and asks over the paging system that the desired party dial 9X XX to retrieve the held call Note Single Line Telephone SLT positions are not able to place a call on Floating Hold However an SLT can retrieve a call on floating Operation To retrieve a call from Floating Hold Action Result 1 Lift the handset 2 Enter 9 followed by the Floating Hold Orbit number Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI1 2 Dial Plan Considerations N A 260 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features Exclusive Hold With Exclusive Hold only the extension that held the call can retrieve it Exclusive Hold can be used to hold CO calls and extension calls Operation To place a call on Exclusive Hold Action Result 1 While on a call hookflash Intercom dial tone To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold Action Result 1 If onhook lift the handset 2 Hookflash Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Hookflash Control on SLTs Consideratio
62. Intercom dial tone 2 A Press the PROG key B Press the AUTO key OR A Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 3 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 000 799 4 Press the HOLD key Cleared Spd Dial displays 5 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 15 16 amp 17 SSD Blocks e FF1 0 02 SSD Digits e FF1 0 03 Extension COS SSD Assignment e FF8 1 02 SSD Number e 8 1 02 SSD Name Considerations e If numbers do not appear on the display when you use SSD codes 00 79 or 000 799 your extension is not programmed to display that data e The System can be programmed to allow SSD numbers to override toll restrictions Speed Dial Linking You can automatically link together up to 6 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers longer than 24 characters You can then dial the entire number by pressing the programmed PSD key or by entering the speed dial bin number Alternatively any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the keys in the desired sequence This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier access codes etc Note Before linking multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin the SSD bins must already have been programmed with the appropriate speed dial information 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 183 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Feature
63. Maintenance Power On 58 User 73 Manual Call Waiting Camp on DSLT 224 Key Telephone 141 SLT 269 Manual Day Night Mode 38 MCO Line Preference 192 MCO Tenant Group 48 MCO Trunk Access DSLT 244 Key Telephone 192 SLT 286 MCO Trunk Access Codes DSLT 245 Key Telephone 193 SLT 287 Meet Me Answer Paging DSLT 236 Key Telephone 176 Priorty Message Wait Callback 167 Message Key ID Code Setting 90 Voice Mail Third Party 70 Message Keys 166 Message Wait Callback Message Key 167 Message Waiting High Priority Voice Mail 70 Message Waiting Callback DSLT 232 Key Telephone 167 SLT 278 Mode Day of Week Mode 101 Exception Day 99 Special Day 93 Mode Schedule Setting 91 MOH 25 Multi CO MCO appearances 165 Multiple Ringing CO Ringing Types 34 Music Background DSLT 207 Key Telephone 116 Music on Hold Background DSLT 207 Key Telephone 116 Music on Hold MOH 50 Mute Function 169 N Name Assignments 50 Extension 51 Speed Dial 54 185 Names Extension 86 Network 57 Network Call Routing 57 Network Call Transfer 57 Network Extension Calling 57 Network Facilities 56 Network Call Routing 57 Network Call Transfer 57 Network Extension Calling 57 Network Paging 57 330 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Index Tandem Connection 57 Network Paging 57 Next Extension Hunt Group 47 Night Mode Automatic 39 Manual 38 Night Night 2 Night 3 37 Non Blo
64. N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 85 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Set Extension Names Description Operation You can assign names to each extension even if the extension is not a display telephone When the extension is called the name appears on the display For more information on the digital key telephone display see Display Information on page 145 To set extension names using either a large display or small display phone Action Result If not already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on page 75 81 User MAINT displays 2 At the 81 level enter 03 3 Press the HOLD key 8103 Extension Name displays 4 Press the HOLD key 0 EXT Number Name displays 5 Press the HOLD key Enter EXT displays 6 Dial the extension number 7 Press the HOLD key A B C D E F XXX displays where XXX extension number 8 Enter the extension name If using a large display phone press the soft key next to the desired row of letters See Example 1 on page 79 If using small display phone press the appropriate one touch key See Example 2 on page 80 Note Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data 9 Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter See Example 1 Large display phone on pa
65. Network Call Routing Network Call Routing allows multiple systems that are interconnected in a network to direct calls to a specific tie line based on the number dialed The call does not leave the network Tandem Connection Tandem Connection allows calls that are received over the network tie lines to be automatically routed on to another PBX or out to the public network Hardware Requirements Tl or E amp M Card Related Programming FF6 ARS TRS Considerations N A Non Blocking Architecture Description The System is totally non blocking All extension and outside lines are available for use at the same time Hardware Requirements CPC96 supports up to 96 ports The CPC288 supports up to 288 ports and should be combined with time switch card TSW288 The CPC 576 supports up to 576 ports and should be combined with time switch card TSW576 Related Programming e N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 57 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Considerations N A Power Failure Transfer Description Power Failure Transfer provides telephone service to a limited number of Single Line Telephones SLTs during a power failure The SLTS are connected to the CO via a Power Failure Unit PFU In the event of a power failure the power failure extensions have dial tone directly from the CO System features and restrictions do not apply Hardware Requirements e PFU VA 43703
66. Night Ring Pattern Night Attend Group Night 1 Message Same for Night 1 Same for Night 1 Same for Night 1 and 2 and 2 and 2 Night 2 Night TRS Mode Night Ring Pattern Night Attend Group Night 2 Message Same for Night 1 and 2 Same for Night 1 and 2 Same for Night 1 and 2 Manual Day Night Mode You can manually change the System mode to Day 1 Day 2 Night Night 2 or Night 3 mode by either entering the correct dial code or by pressing the appropriately programmed FF key When using manual mode the System may be configured to either use MCO tenant Day Night modes or system wide Day Night mode Operation To switch Day Day 2 Night modes using Feature Access Codes Switch Mode Procedure Indication Toggle Day and Press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Night Modes ON OFF LED lights Enter 760 Press the ON OFF key ON OFF LED goes off If changing to Night mode Red LED lights If changing to Day mode Red LED goes off Day 2 Mode Press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone ON OFF LED lights Enter 761 for the Day 2 Feature code Press the ON OFF key ON OFF LED goes off Red LED goes off 38 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 1 1 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Switch Mode Procedure Indication Night 1 Mode 1 Press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone ON OFF LED lights 2 Enter 7
67. Not Forced Non Verified Extension Port Based TRS Extension Port Based TRS Class Class Verified Account Code Based TRS Class Forced Non Verified TRS Class for Forced Extension Port Based TRS Account Code Class Verified FF1 0 19 0001 Account Code Based TRS Class Attendant Group Calls CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialing the designated attendant number Operation To call an attendant group Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the attendant pilot number default 0 Call Attendant displays Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan Extension Number e FF5 0 Attendant Hunt Groups Considerations e Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group e attendant pilot number is flexible famember of an attendant group is for a virtual extension multiple extensions in the attendant group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialed 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 115 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Auto Repeat Dial CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description If you press the REDIAL key while receiving busy tone on an outside call the System automatically redials the number The System continues to redi
68. Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Related Programming e FF1 001 0020 Caller ID Log Outgoing e FF1001 0021 Caller ID Log Control for Private or Out of Area e FF81 10 Set Caller ID Logging Extensions Considerations e Caller ID is available ISDN PRI e Caller ID circuit card must be installed and enabled See Caller ID on page 28 e Caller ID is typically 10 digits If the local calling area requires 7 digit dialing the call log out dialing will not operate properly Camp on Call Waiting CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description If you dial a busy extension you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the called party The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be automatically connected to the new call The called party can also press the HOLD key to place the first call on hold and then answer the waiting call The Sys tem provides two types of call waiting Automatic Call Waiting You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal to the busy extension You need only to remain on the line Manual Call Waiting You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy extension Operation To use Automatic Camp on Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number Wait XXX displays where XXX extension number name Called
69. Panasonic model VB 44225 This model provides a large display that includes one touch access to speed dial numbers telephone features and Help screens Figure 2 VB 44225 key phone Panasonic DIGITAL 02 28 Thu NOV 14 173 Langford S PERSONAL DIAL SYSTEM DIAL EXTENSION FUNCTION SYSTEM FUNCTION EXT CONF MENU PREV NEXT PROG 2 2 J L 2 le i o 4 prec 3 DND CF REDIN 5 JKL 6 MUTE J of 7 PRS gm Q M m D 0 H ON OFF FLASH Y VOLUME A Speakerphone Account Codes CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 AII Versions Description You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times numbers called and outside line numbers used This information is printed for each account on the System Message Detail Recording SMDR record In addition verified account codes may be used to change the TRS level to allow calls to numbers otherwise restricted Account codes may be either forced or unforced voluntary and either verified or unverified 112 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features This feature works with Station Message Detail Recording SMDR During a phone call a station user can silently enter an accounting or cli
70. Press the PROG key 3 Press the one touch key to be programmed 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 173 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Action Result 4 Dial the phone number to be stored 5 Press the HOLD key 6 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To assign an System Speed Dial SSD numbers to a one touch key Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Press the PROG key Press the one touch key to be programmed Press the AUTO key Enter the SSD bin number to be programmed Press the HOLD key SOY qw ue eat Bx ps Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To chain 2 to 6 SSD numbers to a single one touch key Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Press the PROG key Press the one touch key to be programmed Press the AUTO key S fed Enter the SSD bin number that contains the first part of the number to be dialed If a pause is required press the REDIAL key Pause occurs between access code and telephone number Rdisplays Repeat steps 4 5 up to 5 more times for each additional speed dial number to be chained Press the HOLD key Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 174 DBS 576 USA Rev
71. Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Considerations N A ISDN PRI S Point Interface The System supports ISDN PRI terminal devices with the ISDN PRI S Point Interface VB 44540 The PRI provides 23 B bearer plus 1 D data channel support 23B D 1544 kbps Either 8 or 16 or 24 circuits may be enabled on the interface Each enabled group of 8 circuits requires a slot position in the System A fully used card uses 3 slot positions Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A Flexible Numbering Plan Description The System provides flexible numbering for feature access special numbers and extension numbers The dialing plan allows settings for digits dialed at dial tone digits dialed at ringback tone digits dialed at busy tone two patterns of feature codes dialed at dial tone two patterns of feature codes dialed at ringback tone and two patterns of feature codes dialed at busy tone Feature access codes can be used when replacing another PBX system with a DBS 576 system Rather than learning the new access codes the System feature access codes can be changed to match the old system As a result telephone users are less confused by the change and the requirement for retraining is reduced Two sets of feature access codes are available one of the two must be assigned to the terminal Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming e N A Considerations
72. Since SLTs are not equipped with feature keys most features are accessed by using the dialpad and or the switchhook Purpose The purpose of this manual is to provide an overview of feature operations and requirements Where applicable the following types of information are provided for each feature Types of information Purpose Description Provides an overview of how the feature works and in some cases what it is typically used for Operation Includes step by step instructions on how to use the feature Hardware Requirements Lists any special hardware that is required to use the feature 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 Chapter 1 About This Manual Section 700 Operation Related Programming Lists the programming subsystems associated with the feature Considerations Provides details on feature interactions and limita tions Abbreviation List ACD ARS BGM BLF BRI Automatic Call Distributor Automatic Route Selection Background Music Busy Lamp Field Basic Rate Interface CFWD Call Forward COS DDI DIL DISA DL DND DP DSLT DSS DSU DTMF FF MCO MOH PRI PSD SLT SSD TRS LCR Class of Service Direct Inward Dial Direct In Line direct Inward System Access Direct Line Do Not Disturb Dial Pulse Digital Single Line Telephone Direct Station Selector Digital Service Unit Dual Tone Multifrequency Flexible Function Multipl
73. System Features assignments in the DID Table names or trunk numbers are displayed Names can be up to 10 digits long DID Ringing can be very useful by sending calls directly to a specific extension hunt group etc based upon the number dialed Since a relatively small number of trunks handle the DID calls this can be more cost efficient than DIL trunks or attendant group answering and transfer DID may send a call to a group using the Virtual Extension feature DID Busy Delayed Ringing is also available with DID Ringing See DID Day Night Busy Delayed Ringing on page 61 For more information on DID CO Trunk Interface see CO Trunk Interface DID on page 34 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations e Caller ID takes priority over the DID name assignment e Only one of the two DID tables may have name assignments Direct In Line Ringing DIL Ringing allows calls on a specific CO line to be directed to ring a specific extension System Speed Dial SSD number for redirecting calls out and hunting group This can be very useful when a trunk is dedicated to a specific person or purpose However this can be a more expensive use of the line since it has a more limited use Hardware Hequirements e N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A Direct Inward System Access Ringing DISA Ringing which is related to the DISA feature allows a CO trunk specified as a
74. System checks Restriction TRS Level in Analyze Digit Table Is Origination TRS Level greater than Restriction TRS Level No Restrict call System outdials digit s on trunk Has the Max of Following Digits been outdialed System collects additional digit and outdials Restrict Call 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 297 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation If the analyze digits table is referenced by a Prefix ID the system will consider at all entries with the Prefix ID and analyze any additional digits dialed The system will look for the longest exact match If there is an exact match the system compares the entered TRS Restriction value to the call originator s assigned TRS level If the Restriction value is equal to or greater than the originator s TRS level the call is denied Otherwise the call is allowed to proceed Example TRS Configuration As an example of setting up TRS assume that XYZ Department Store is using the DBS 576 PBX Situation This example installation has the following considerations Only one tenant one MCO tenant group operation e 75 retail floor store phones restricted to local telephone use only except for 1800 1888 and calls to Birmingham Alabama where a sister store and many suppliers are located restrict special calling numbers 976 1900 outside operator etc 911 always allowed 40 general office phones long d
75. TRS Class of Service feature can be used a Walking Class of Service code must be entered at your extension before using dialing privileges at another extension Operation To use a Walking Class of Service code Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key of an extension other than your own Intercom dial tone Enter 87 Dial your extension number Enter your Walking Class of Service code 0001 9999 C ed COPS Enter a trunk access code 9 or 81 84 198 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Action Result 6 Dial the phone number Walking Class of Service remains in effect until you replace the handset 7 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF8 1 08 Walking Class of Service Code Considerations The same Walking Class of Service code can be used on more than one extension Walking Class of Service mode is kept until the user goes on hook ARS and TRS dialing privileges follow the Walking Class of Service Before entering a new Walking COS code you must first clear the existing code When Walking COS is used Wxxxx where xxxx is the user s extension number appears in SMDR 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation 200
76. Table 1 200 1 100 digits y Digits Route List 1 100 8 Digits 8 level or below Time List 2 Tables will be or Time List 1 50 restricted 1 1 1 N A N A N A N A 2 101 1 N A N A N A N A 3 10 1 N A N A N A N A 4 101 1 N A N A N A N A 5 10 1 N A N A N A N A 0 N A 8 N A N A 7 01 2 N A 8 N A N A 7 911 0 N A 0 N A N A 8 1 0 N A 4 N A N A 95 976 0 N A 4 N A N A 10 0 N A 1 N A N A 304 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation In this case Prefix ID 1 links calls that have a dialed prefix of 1 Several entries are made to determine the restriction TRS level and the Route Type The call originator must have a Origination TRS Level exceeding for the call to be allowed If any other analyze digits are dialed this would be covered by the three wildcards In this case the call originator must have a TRS level exceeding 2 for the call to be allowed Table A 6 Example Analyze Digits Worksheet Pattern Number 1 500 Prefix ID Digits to Analyze in addition to the leading digits Number of Following Digits Restriction TRS Level Any Origination TRS at this level or below will be restricted Route Type Route Table 0 Route List 1 Time List 2 Route Pattern Number Route Table 1 200 Route List 1 100 or Time List 1 50 20555 120555XXXXX N A INXX976XXX
77. Telephone 158 Handsfree Operation Key Telephone 158 Headset Operation 159 SLT 261 Floating Hold DSLT 215 Key Telephone 125 SLT 260 Music 50 System Hold DSLT 214 Key Telephone 124 SLT 259 Hot Dial Pad 160 Hot Line DSLT 230 Key Telephone 160 Hunt Group Circular 47 Next Extension 47 Pilot Distributed 47 Pilot Terminal 46 Switch Back 47 Hunting Groups 46 ID Codes Setting 89 Intercom Calling DSLT 231 Key Telephone 161 SLT 275 Tone Calling DSLT 231 Key Telephone 161 SLT 275 Voice Calling DSLT 231 Key Telephone 161 SLT 275 Interface Extension 43 ISDN BRI 44 ISDN PRI 45 Trunk 34 Internal Hold Tone 48 ISDN PRI Trunk Interface 35 Hold ISDN BRI S Point Interface Broker s Hold Extension Interface 44 DSLT 217 ISDN PRI S Point Interface Key Telephone 127 Extension Interface 45 SLT 261 Exclusive Hold DSLT 216 Key Telephone 126 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 329 Index Section 700 Operation K SLT 280 Memory Backup 49 Message Key key Message Wait Callback 167 ANSWER 154 Key Telephone Illustration 112 Multi CO MCO appearances 165 Key Telephone Features 109 L Large Display Phone Display Information 146 Last Number Redial DSLT 232 Key Telephone 162 SLT 276 Leading Digits Table 293 294 Least Cost Routing 291 Line Appearances 163 Direct Line Appearances 165 DSS BLF Appearances 163 Line appearances Multi CO MCO 165 List of features 13 Loop Start Trunk Interface 36
78. These codes can also be either forced or voluntary You can program these codes with their own Toll Restriction Service TRS Class assignment so that when entered they will override the extension s TRS Class Thus Verified Account Code users can float from phone to phone placing calls that would normally be restricted on that phone Non Verified Account Codes Non Verified Account codes are voluntary codes i e You do not have to enter an account code before making a call You can assign Non Verified Account codes to both incoming and outgoing calls To assign an account code to an outgoing call you enter the account code before making the call or during the call To assign an account code to an incoming call you enter the account code during the call Operation To enter an account code before making a call Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the Account Code feature code default 8 Enter the Account Code up to 10 digits Press the key Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code Ox UT EE Dial the phone number 204 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features To enter an account code during an outside call Action Result During a call press the AUTO key Press the key Enter the Account Code up to 10 digits ae
79. Time HHMM 1155 1157 1159 1161 1163 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1156 1165 1158 1162 1162 1164 Start Time HHMM 1166 1168 1170 1172 1174 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1167 1176 1169 1171 1173 1175 Start Time HHMM 1177 1179 1181 1183 1185 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 1178 1180 1182 1184 1186 98 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance 8107 1 1000 1219 Hold MMDD or HHMM or 0 5 Hold Special Day 18 Special Day 19 Special Day 20 VALUES MMDD HHMM or 0 5 Date MMDD 1st MODE 1187 ADDRESS NOs 1000 1219 2nd MODE MODES 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE Start Time HHMM 1188 1190 1192 1194 1196 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1189 1198 1191 1193 1195 1197 Start Time HHMM 1199 1201 1203 1205 1207 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1200 1209 1202 1204 1206 1208 Start Time HHM
80. XXXX and 205 557 XXXX Allow 911 911 Only No Outside Calling PBX Centrex amp Extension only 302 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation 3 Next the Origination TRS Level is determined for each Trunk group per class Using Table 1 Example User Needs Worksheet on page 300 each unique origination class is determined Then using Table 3 Example Origination TRS Level Plan on page 302 the TRS level is determined for each class If there were multiple trunk groups available a TRS level would be assigned for each trunk group for each class Table 4 Example Origination TRS Class Level Worksheet Origination TRS Class Origination TRS Level 0 9 Number User Type s Trunk Group Trunk Group Trunk Group Trunk Group Trunk Group Executive Office loading dock 1 Description Description Description Description Description Used for all outside calls Executive Day Night 9 Attendant Day Buyer Day Night General Office Day General Office Night Attendant Group Night Retail Floor Day Night Warehouse Day Night 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 303 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation Calls are screened by first considering the initial digits dialed In this case the first Prefix Dialed entry is a 1 This wi
81. allowed to make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS After a call is made the SMDR record for the call will show the verified account code Operation To make an outside call that requires an account code Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Verified Account ID code default 8 Enter Account displays 3 Enter the Account Code 10 digits max Account Code entry displays 4 Press the key Entered Account displays 5 Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code CO Key LED lights 6 Dial the phone number Dialed phone number displays Hardware Requirements e An SMDR printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code records Related Programming e FF1 0 19 TRS Class for Forced Account Code e FF1 2 Dial Plan FF3 Forced Account FF3 Verified Account e FF8 1 04 Verified Account Codes with TRS Class Considerations e Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built In Voice Mail e Account codes will be cancelled after using CO queuing 114 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features e Account Codes interact with TRS as shown in the following table TRS Class Forced or Not Forced ODS Vere No Account Entry Account Entry
82. bin number 00 79 or 000 799 gu Complete the call and replace the handset To delete an SSD number Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 3 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 000 799 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 1 1 98 283 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Action Result 4 Press the key 5 Replace the handset Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 15 16 amp 17 SSD Blocks e FF1 0 02 SSD Digits e FF1 0 03 Extension COS SSD Assignment e FF8 1 02 SSD Number e FF8 1 02 SSD Name Considerations system can be programmed to allow SSD Numbers to override toll restrictions Speed Dial Linking You can automatically link together up to 6 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers longer than 24 characters Alternatively any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the keys in the desired sequence This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier access codes etc Operation To use a PSD that links multiple SSDs Action Result Lift the handset If necessary access an outside line Outside dial tone Enter the Speed Dial Originate code default 80 Enter the desired PSD bin number 80 99
83. call is camped on 170 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Operation After receiving an offhook signal during a call Action Result 1 Press the HOLD key First call on hold 2 Press the flashing FF key for the CO line of the incoming call Note For details about handling multiple calls see Call Hold on page 124 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming CO Off Hook Signal Considerations e The CO call type may be multiple ring direct BLF Ring or camp on System does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions During a conference call During an OHVA or Busy override Data Privacy is enabled thereceiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail oice Announce All Versions Description You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call and then use the Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA feature to make an announcement that only the called party can hear You can also transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the announcement using this feature The called party may optionally reply to answer an OHVA call Operation To make an OHVA Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key 2 Dial the extension number Busy signal 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 171 Chapter 5 Key Telephone F
84. code default 30 BGM ON displays 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To turn Background Music off Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Background Music code default 30 BGM OFF displays 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e The music source must be purchased separately It is not provided with the System A N Important A license may be required from the American Society of Compos ers Authors and Publishers ASCAP or similar organizations to transmit radio or recorded music through the MOH and or Background Music feature Pana sonic Telecommunication Systems Company its distributors and affiliates assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment fail to obtain such a license Related Programming N A Considerations N A Busy Override CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 AIl Versions Description Busy Override allows you to break into another user s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent information or to create three party conference calls 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 117 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Operation To break into a call with a line appearance on your phone CO Key Busy Override Action Result 1 Press the lit direct CO key Alert tone sounds to both phones Sys tem programming required
85. codes etc Note Before linking multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin the SSD bins must already have been programmed with the appropriate speed dial information Operation To link multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin Action Result Determine the SSD bin numbers to be linked Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 C COP ES Press the AUTO key 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 241 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Action Result 6 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 000 799 that contains the first part of the number to be called 7 Repeat steps 5 6 up to 5 more times for all additional SSDs to be dialed 8 Press the HOLD key when finished To use a PSD that links multiple SSDs Action Result 1 If necessary select the trunk group 9 81 8 Normally the trunk is selected by the speed dial numbers 2 Press the AUTO key 3 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 To manually link speed dials together Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 If necessary access an outside line Outside dial tone 3 Press the AUTO key then enter the PSD or SSD bin num ber 4 Press the AUTO key and enter the PSD or SSD codes to dial the parts of the phone
86. default 9 Alert tone sounds to both extensions system programming required Connected to both parties Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 01 Splash Tone Busy Override e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Manual DND Override Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Forced DND Override e FF1 2 Dial Plan Extension COS Data Security Considerations e You cannot break in on three party conference calls e default for the Override Alert Tone is off If the Override Alert Tone is enabled the tone will be sent to both parties when a call is overridden Callback Request CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description If you dial a busy extension Callback Request enables the System to call you back when that extension becomes free When you answer the System automatically rings the called party again Operation To set a Callback Request Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dialthe extension number Busy tone 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 209 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Action Result 3 Enter the Callback Request code default 3 Ringback tone 4 Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone System calls back when called extension becomes free To respond to the callback request Action Result 1 Lift
87. destinations when the system is in night mode Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 4 DID Day Destination e FF1 4 DID Night Destination Considerations N A DID Day Night Busy Delayed Ringing DID Day Night Busy Delayed Ringing causes an incoming DID call to a busy primary extension to ring at a designated extension or extensions DID Busy Delayed Ringing also causes an incoming DID call that is unanswered at a primary extension within a certain period of time to ring at a designated extension or extensions Separate ring destinations are available for day and night modes DID Busy Delayed Ringing is also available for hunt group pilot numbers However when the Queuing Timer expires the call leaves the hunt group and is forwarded to the DID Busy Delayed Ringing destination Hardware Hequirements N A Related Programming e FFI 4 DID Day Busy Delayed Destination e FFI 4 DID Night Busy Delayed Destination e FF5 0 02 Queuing Timer Considerations e Call Forwarding takes priority over DID Busy Delayed Ringing e If the call is part of a hunt group and the Queuing Timer expires the call is forwarded to the DID Busy Delay Ringing destination See DID Day Night Busy Delayed Ringing on page 61 Busy Lamp Field Ringing Extensions that have Direct Station Select DSS BLF FF keys assigned may be set to ring on those keys Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF Key Assignm
88. dial tone 2 Enter the Background Music code default 30 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To turn Background Music off Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Background Music code default 30 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e The music source must be purchased separately It is not provided with the System AN Important A license may be required from the American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers ASCAP or similar organizations to transmit radio or recorded music through the MOH and or Background Music feature Panasonic Telecommunication Systems Company its dis tributors and affiliates assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment fail to obtain such a license Related Programming N A Considerations e N A Busy Override CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Busy Override allows you to break into one another s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent information or to create three party conference calls 208 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Operation To use Extension Busy Override Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number Busy tone 3 Enter the Busy Override code
89. group If the called party does not exist the call recalls to the transferring extension e You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do Not Disturb DND activated Youcan transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to For example if extension 221 is forwarded to extension 225 calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to extension 225 e Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer Camp On Call Waiting CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description If you dial a busy extension you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the called party The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be 268 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features automatically connected to the new call The called party can also place the first call on hold by Hookflashing and then answering the waiting call The System provides two types of call waiting e Automatic Call Waiting You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal You need only to remain on the line e Manual Call Waiting You must enter a code to send Call Waiting signal to the busy extension Operation To use Automatic Camp on Action Result 1 Lift the ha
90. handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code default 0 Enter TRK displays 3 Enter the trunk number Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF1 0 01 Floating Hold on HOLD Key FF1 0 03 Extension COS Hold Key Operation FF1 2 Dial Plan Considerations N A Floating Hold Floating Hold is a type of System Hold that allows you to retrieve a held call from any extension that has an FF key assigned to the same Floating Hold orbit where the call is held You can also retrieve a call by dialing the Floating Hold orbit number for the held call Floating Hold is useful when the intended recipient of a call must be located via a page The call can be placed in a Floating Hold orbit and that orbit number announced during the page The paged party can then pick up the call by dialing the orbit number or by pressing an FF key assigned to that orbit number Note To place a call on Floating Hold you should have at least one FF key assigned to a Floating Hold orbit number 001 576 Operation To place a call on Floating Hold Action Result 1 While on a call press the Floating FF key system program ming required or press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone Hold CO XXX displays where XXX outside line number 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 125 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Se
91. into the telephone s Voice Recognition Unit in order for the System to recognize the verbal commands Volume Control CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description The System allows you to set different receiving volumes for the handset speaker intercom ring tone and incoming ring tone Operation To adjust the volume while your phone is in use Action Result 1 Press the VOLUME A or V key Intercom dial tone During ringing to adjust intercom or incoming ring tone During a call to adjust handset or speaker volume 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 197 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation To adjust ringer volume while your phone is idle Action Result Press the ON OFF key Press the PROG key Enter 9 then 1 to adjust the incoming ring tone OR Enter 9 then 2 to adjust the intercom ring tone Pseudo ring tone Press the VOLUME or V key to adjust the loudness of the tone Press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF3 0 Ring Volume Control Considerations Extension programming determines whether or not you can set separate volume levels for CO incoming ring tone and intercom ring tone Walking TRS Class of Service Walking TRS Class of Service allows an extension user to carry his or her toll restrictions to another phone Before the Walking
92. key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the CF AII DND Clear code default 7 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward All Busy No Answer DND Cancel e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward All Calls e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward Busy e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward No Answer e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward Other e FF1 2 Dial Plan Considerations e Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding or DND activated For example extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded e forwarding to an outside number the destination number must be pre programmed into a System Speed Dial SSD code e Call Forwarding Busy and Call Forwarding No Answer can both be set at the same time 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 123 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation You can set Call Forwarding All Calls while Call Forwarding No Answer and or Call Forwarding Busy are set Canceling one mode only affects that mode however the other modes will remain set until c anceled individually An auto camp on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination A manual camp on to a busy extension will not forward If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set calls immediate
93. or Handsfree Answerback CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Handsfree Answerback allows you to answer an intercom call without lifting the handset 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 157 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation The System must be programmed for Voice Calling for you to use this feature You must press 1 during a call to switch from Tone Calling to Voice Calling Operation To answer calls using Handsfree Answerback Action Result 1 When the intercom call arrives confirm that the MUTE LED is off if it is lit press the MUTE key to turn it off 2 Speak into the microphone to answer Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Intercom Calling Type e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Voice Call Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Voice Call Receive e Extension COS Considerations e Handsfree Answerback can be used to respond to only voice calls from other extensions not tone calls e Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension Class of Service COS that allows Voice Calling Handsfree Operation CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Handsfree Operation allows you to use all available System features without lifting the handset Any speakerphone can be operated handsfree Operation 158 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13
94. pressing the ON OFF key Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension Operation To camp a call onto a busy extension Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number to which the call is to be trans ferred 3 If your extension does not have Auto Camp On activated Camp on tone heard at called extension enter the Camp On Call Waiting code default 2 4 Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 223 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Related Programming FF1 0 03 Extension COS Onhook Transfer at Ringback FF1 0 03 Extension COS Onhook Transfer at Talk FF1 0 03 Extension COS Onhook Transfer at Camp on Considerations On Hook Transfer is not enabled for the transferring party s Extension Class of Service COS he she cannot complete the transfer If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires the call will recall to the transferring extension If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires the call will revert to the Attendant group If the called party does not exist the call recalls to the transferring extension You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do Not Disturb DND activated You can transfer a call
95. ra mor E616 6730 73 nals Dee eaten aaa eam 117 Callback Request 2 55224 devas ewww ee ee ROO 119 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 5 Contents Section 700 Operation Call Forwarding coste wae da Ee c wie oleae 120 Call Forwarding All Calls ae s 559 6 eo eos s 9 e We gd 120 Call Forwarding BUSY vus kr wx Y R Xe Re ey a eee ke tees ee eee eee 121 Call Forwarding No Answers o armes cce ce pc E Rm EROR TTE TRU aa Re RR ele 122 Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb 0 0 0 en 123 Hold ia hue AR Ere reae Dd a a Aer 124 System Holds ous uoa eu st Li cae are hE d eiu Rr DE ERAI 124 Floaurig Fold x2 4x eL ERE RTT ES AER Ier iex dere ade n 125 Exclusive Holdi so ero a esas ace ek oom ine Id Rs wae MOM dais 126 Broker s Hold 4 o uU SURE OC IT RAE RTI SIC Ane E ue dit 127 AM e a ek MN att rag es a ara ee ee Ae 127 Call Siac on oos ed va roc x1 crac aa ten dee ad oes tava ds 129 Extension Group Pickup dodo x td ra CR CROP Ced ete pcd en RT eee tee wed 129 Extension Direct Pickup utram Das ks nm doxes SN ERAT AES we 131 Mr nkGr up Pick Ps eoo EN to dated hien es 131 Trunk Direct Pickup s e ERES Ea RR en eee ee RUPEE eR REDE 132 Gall Transfer EV eei d xx oe tan arce 132 Supervised Transfer 2 2 1
96. scroll through the SSD Directory press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display SSD numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial directory For information on programming speed dial numbers see Speed Dialing on page 179 Extension Contains the Extension Directory grouped alphabetically To scroll through the Extension Directory press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display Function System Provides easy access to most key telephone features such as Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb DND Microphone Mute Background Music Call Pickup Account Codes Message Waiting Callback Headset On Off Extension Port confirmation etc To scroll through the list of items press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display Function Ext Allows you to assign frequently used telephone features for easy access Most items found under Function System can be assigned to the Function Ext area in any order you desire For additional information see Section 400 Programming 146 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Large LCD Display During Idle The large display telephone may optionally be set to return to a selected idle screen after the user goes on hook If the Large LCD Display During Idle setting FF3 0 BSSC 04 11 HOLD is set to 1 allow after moving to the desired menu is displayed the user may en
97. the System This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the following System Features Topic Page AEC Disconnect 22 Attendant Groups 22 Attendant Groups 22 Automatic Call Distributor 23 Automatic Route Selection 24 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer 25 Background Music MOH Separation 25 Battery Backup 25 Building Block Expansion Capability 26 Built In Voice Processing Unit 26 Call Progress Tones 27 Caller ID 28 Centrex PBX Compatibility 28 Class of Service 29 Class of Service Trunk Tie 29 Class of Service Ext Ext Restriction 30 Class of Service Extension Feature 30 Class of Service Trunk to Trunk Restriction 32 CO Ringing Types 32 Direct Inward Dial Ringing 32 Direct In Line Ringing 33 Direct Inward System Access Ringing 33 Multiple Ringing 34 CO Trunk Interface 34 CO Trunk Interface DID 34 CO Trunk Interface Ground Start 35 CO Trunk Interface ISDN BRI 35 CO Trunk Interface ISDN PRI 35 CO Trunk Interface Loop Start 36 Computer Telephony Integration Capability 36 Data Security 37 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 19 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Topic Page Day Night System Mode 37 Manual Day Night Mode 38 Automatic Day Night Mode 39 Digital Pad 40 Direct Inward System Access 40 Distinctive Ringing 41 Door Box 42 Door Box Sensor 43
98. the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 A Press the PROG key B Press the AUTO key OR A Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 000 799 Enter Spd Dial displays Dial the phone number Press the HOLD key Stored Spd Dial displays Nin BRI Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 If necessary access an outside line Outside dial tone 3 Press the AUTO key OR Enter the Speed Dial Originate code default 80 A displays 4 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 000 799 5 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To check an SSD number Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Press the CONF key C displays Press the AUTO key Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 000 799 Programmed data displays Spp wm pe If you want to check the next SSD number press the HOLD key 6 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 182 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To delete an SSD number Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key
99. the TRS restrictions on that phone The TRS assigned to the Verified Account code will override the phone s TRS Operation To set the Verified Account code Action Result 1 If not already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on page 75 81 User MAINT displays 2 Atthe 81 level enter 04 3 Press the HOLD key 8104 Verified ACCD displays 4 Press the HOLD key Table Number displays 5 Enter the Verified Account table number 001 500 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 87 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Action Result 6 Press the HOLD key XXX Verified ACCD displays where XXX account code table number 7 Press the HOLD key 0001 AAAAAAAAAAA XXX Account Cod displays where AAAAAAAAAAA current account code and XXX account code table number 8 Enter up to ten digit Verified Account Code All Verified Account Codes must be unique If there is a matching entry entered the System will not accept the entry and will double beep Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key 9 Press the HOLD key 0002 X XXX TRS Class displays where X TRS Class 10 Enter the TRS Class to be associated with the Verified Account Code entry 11 Press the HOLD key to store the entry 0001 YYY displays wher
100. the desired extension function location see Flexible Screen Positions below 3 Press PROG soft key Fixed Feature Code see Table 13 on page 154 or press PROG 95 XX REDIAL Flexible Feature Code see Table 13 on page 154 4 Press the ON OFF key Flexible Screen Positions Mr Mesas Display Displays dt Position 1 to 10 Intercom Dial Tone Intercom Dial Position 11 to 15 Intercom Ringback Tone Position 16 to 25 Intercom Busy Tone Position 26 to 30 Talk Hardware Requirements e A 44 Series Display Telephone or or the VB 43225 Large Display Telephone Related Programming e FF4 2 Flexible Screens e FF3 0 Variable Modes 196 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Considerations e The small display telephone will exit variable mode after a variable mode function is executed e The large display telephone will stay in variable mode after a function is executed Voice Recognition CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Voice Recognition allows you to dial another extension or a speed dial number using verbal commands You can also quickly access various telephone features by voice Hardware Requirements e Need VB 44224 VB 44101 Related Programming e N A Considerations The VB 44224 24 key telephone is required e You must pre program the desired calling information
101. the originator or the receiver by calling the other party Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Message Wait set cancel e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Priority Message Wait set cancel 168 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features e FFI 2 Dial Plan FF3 Extension COS Considerations The System has priority message waiting for 3rd party Voice Mail See Voice Mail Integration Third Party on page 68 Mute Function CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Mute Function allows you to block outgoing audio to the other party while on a call With 44 Series phones audio can be blocked through both the microphone and the handset For handset mute an FF key must first be assigned as a MUTE key Operation To block outgoing audio using the Handset Mute 44 Series phones only Action Result 1 During a handset call press the MUTE key Outgoing audio is blocked through phone s handset 2 To turn Mute off press the MUTE key again To block outgoing audio using the Microphone Mute Action Result 1 During a handset call press the MUTE FF key Outgoing audio is blocked through phone s microphone 2 To turn Mute off press the MUTE FF key again Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF4 Key Assignment Considerations
102. the system is in Night mode call can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt group per the Night ringing assignments Inbound calls can be directed to desired normal daytime locations by setting the system into a Day mode By having a second day mode Day 2 alternative call handling is available during day operation For instance during lunch calls can be directed to an alternative position Calls can be directed specific night locations when the system is set to Night mode For more information on Day Ringing see Day Night System Mode on page 37 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming Considerations N A Day 1 Day 2 Night Delayed Ringing CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Delayed Ringing causes an incoming outside call that is unanswered at a primary extension within a certain period of time to ring at a designated extension or extensions Delayed ringing destinations can be set for Day1 Day 2 and Night modes CO Delayed Ringing is also available for hunt group pilot numbers Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF2 Trunk Setting Ringing Assignments e FF11 02 Delayed Timer Day 1 Day2 Night Considerations N A 60 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features DID Day Night Ringing Incoming DID calls can be set to ring at day destinations when the system is in day mode and ring at night
103. to dial the number of the ringing extension Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available e Call Pickup All Calls You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension group e Call Pickup External Calls You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own extension group e Specified Group Pickup You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension group 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 129 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Operation To use Extension Group Pickup All Calls Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Extension Group Pickup All Calls code default 701 Extension number or outside phone num ber displays 3 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To use Extension Group Pickup External Calls Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Extension Group Pickup External Calls code default 702 Extension number or outside phone num ber displays 3 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To use Specified Group Pickup Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Specified Group Pickup code default 703 3 Ent
104. to pre assigned extension or speed dial number Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF5 5 Hot Line 230 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Considerations N A Intercom Calling CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The System provides two methods of intercom calling e Voice Calling Extension calls are connected immediately without a ringing tone e Tone Calling A ringing tone is sent to the called extension Extension Class of Service COS programming determines whether the default for the originating extension is voice or tone calling Regardless of the default you can toggle between voice or tone calling by entering the Tone Voice Call feature code For example if the extension default is tone calling you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone Voice Call feature access code Operation To make a call using Intercom Calling Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number 3 If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to make a voice call enter 1 Or if your extension is set for voice call and you want to make a tone call enter 1 4 Speak when your call is answered 5 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 0
105. 1 98 291 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation Detailed Description This section provides a description of the TRS and ARS options on the DBS 576 PBX TRS Features TRS Class Features Each trunk and extension in the DBS 576 PBX is assigned to one of 50 TRS classes Each TRS class is assigned a Day TRS level and a Night TRS level for each Trunk group This assigned origination party TRS level is compared to the restriction TRS Level determined by the dialed number If the Origination Party TRS level is not higher than the restriction party TRS level the call is denied In addition each TRS class is assigned settings such as Outgoing Dial Digit Restriction Incoming Dialing Restriction Outgoing SSD Dialing Restriction and and Dialing Restriction Outgoing Dialed Digit Maximum This TRS Class based parameter sets the maximum number of digits that can be dialed for outgoing calls in TRS Class The maximum number of digits can be set from 0 20 When set to 0 default there is no restriction Dialing Restriction During Inbound Calls Determines whether dialing during an incoming call is restricted on trunks in a TRS Class TRS Override on SSD Dialing Determines whether SSD dialing will override TRS on extensions for a TRS Class Star and Pound Dialing Restriction Determines if the or key can be used in dialing for a TRS Class TRS Level for Non ARS Routing For each of the 50 TRS clas
106. 117 Direct In Line Ringing SLT 254 CO Ringing Types 33 DSLT 226 Direct Inward Dial Ringing Eight Party CO Ringing Types 32 DSLT 226 Direct Inward System Access DISA 40 Key Telephone 144 Direct Inward System Access DISA Ringing SLT 271 CO Ringing Types 33 Key Telephone 143 Direct Line Appearances 165 SLT 270 Direct Trunk Access Three Party DSLT 244 DSLT 226 Key Telephone 191 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 327 Index Section 700 Operation SLT 286 DISA 40 Display Information 145 Changing Display Contrast 147 Large Display Phone 146 Small Display Phone 147 Distinctive Ringing 41 Distributed Hunt Group 47 Do Not Distrub DND DSLT 228 Key Telephone 148 Do Not Disturb Call Forwarding DSLT 213 Key Telephone 123 SLT 258 Do Not Disturb DND SLT 272 Door Box 42 Door Box Sensor 43 Door Phone 42 DP Signal Conversion DSLT 229 Key Telephone 150 DP to DTMF Signal Conversion DSLT 229 Key Telephone 150 DP DTMF Single Line Telephones SLTs Extension Interface 44 DSLT Features 201 DSS 72 Console 150 DSS BLF Appearances 163 DTMF Signal Conversion DSLT 229 Key Telephone 150 E Eight Party Conference Calls DSLT 226 Key Telephone 144 SLT 271 EM 24 Console 151 Example ARS Configuration 309 Example TRS Configuration 298 Exception Day Mode Setting 99 Exclusive Hold DSLT 216 Key Telephone 126 SLT 261 Expansion Capability 26 Extension Set Call Forward Busy Destination 104 Set Call Forward No Answer Des
107. 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 167 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Operation To leave a message waiting indication Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number 3 While the phone is still ringing or when you hear the busy MSG Accepted displays tone enter the Message Wait Set code default 4 4 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Message lamp flashes at called exten sion MSG EXT XXX displays where XXX calling extension number or name of calling extension displays at called extension To answer a message waiting indication callback Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Message Wait Callback code default 2 6 or Telephone automatically dials exten press the MSG key if using a large display phone sion that sent the message waiting indi cation Message lamp goes off when your call is answered To cancel a callback message Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Callback Request Cancel code default 5 or MSG Cleared displays press the MSG key if using a large display phone 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Message lamp goes off Note Message waiting callback messages may also be cancelled by either
108. 275 Voice Mail Call Forward ID Code Third Party 68 High Priority Message Waiting 70 Message Key ID Code Third Party 70 Voice Mail ID Codes Setting 89 Voice Mail Integration Third Party 68 Voice Mail Transfer Key 71 Voice Processing Unit 26 Voice Recognition 197 Volume Control 197 W Walking TRS Class of Service 198 Walking TRS Codes Setting 103 334 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700
109. 3 Extension COS Intercom Calling Type e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Voice Call Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Voice Call Receive e Extension COS Considerations Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 231 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation e You cannot change from voice call to tone call Last Number Redial CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialed by pressing the REDIAL key Operation To automatically redial the last number dialed Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Outside dial tone if trunk access code OR entered Enter a trunk access code 2 Press the REDIAL key 3 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Intercom Redialing Extension COS Considerations e Extension Class of Service COS determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both intercom and CO calls or CO calls only Message Waiting Callback CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer you can leave a message wait indication at that extension requesting a return call
110. 32 Unsupervised Transfer oos EI CE RR IE 134 Camping a Call Onto a Busy 135 Caller ID Call LOG 423 2g EXE en Inu doi he ec ne rr e e 136 Log Operation on a Small Display Key 137 Call Log Operation on a Large Display Key 139 Call Waiting scere eee deweds cheb ee ii Ges ete eres 141 Calls aoo Excess cR CE o RR ROC CT EAR RT we 143 Three Party Conferencing bs ete se poe TE RE eae E Phen ee see eee RERO 143 Eight Party Conferencing oth att resa d PL Ee rd 144 Display Information eee een eS 145 Large Display Phone ne teks etd ter eae ie ee Maat ide Ae eins 146 Small Display PRONG 2 2 re x eae au be adu ka 147 Changing the Display Contrast 12 s d t rp alee os EE USE T E 147 Do NoEDISTUIDS iua 9 xa cara Vr eai dux la Eas a 148 DP to DTMF Signal Conversion 0 150 DSS 72 GOS ONS rcu n aeos acie a on nn OQ a Ea a HR RC M UR Bee 150 EM 24 Consol haat et timers A c x Rt CREAR 151 E rtl 151 Flexible Function Keys jc ere EE ERE EE 152
111. 4 Software Version 11 Special Day Mode Setting 93 Speed Dial Linking DSLT 241 Key Telephone 183 SLT 284 Speed Dial Name Assignments 54 185 Speed Dialing DSLT 238 Key Telephone 179 Personal DSLT 238 Key Telephone 179 332 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Index SLT 282 SLT 281 System DSLT 240 Key Telephone 181 SLT 283 S Point Interface ISDN BRI 44 ISDN PRI 45 SSD Index Setting 84 SSD Names Setting 83 SSD Numbers Setting 82 SSD TRS Override 63 Star and Pound Dialing Restriction 292 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 63 Supervised Call Transfer DSLT 222 Key Telephone 132 SLT 266 Switch Back Hunt Group 47 System Background Music 25 System Features 19 System Hold DSLT 214 Key Telephone 124 SLT 259 System Mode Day 37 Day Night 37 Night 37 System Speed Dialing SSD DSLT 240 Key Telephone 181 SLT 283 T Tandem Connection 57 Telephone Programming 59 Tenant Operation Timed Reminder Call DSLT 242 Key Telephone 189 SLT 285 Toll Restriction Service 291 Toll Restriction Service TRS 59 Tone Internal Hold 48 Tone Calling Intercom Calling DSLT 231 Key Telephone 161 SLT 275 Tones Call Progress 27 Transfer Automatic Trunk To Trunk 25 Camping on Busy Extension DSLT 223 Key Telephone 135 SLT 268 DSLT 222 Key Telephone 132 Network Call 57 Power Failure 58 SLT 266 Supervised DSLT 222 Key Telephone 132 SLT 266 Unsupervised DSLT 223 Key T
112. 6 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Related Programming e FF8 1 08 Walking Class of Service Code Considerations same Walking Class of Service code can be used on more than one extension e Walking Class of Service mode is kept until the user goes on hook e ARS and TRS dialing privileges follow the Walking Class of Service Before entering a new Walking COS code you must first clear the existing code e When Walking COS is used Wxxxx where xxxx is the user s extension number appears in SMDR 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 247 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation 248 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Chapter 7 SLT Features SLTs are industry standard 2500 sets SLTs are not equipped with feature keys or line keys so basic telephone operations are performed by pressing dialpad keys and or using the switchhook This chapter describes the following features that are available with Single Line Telephones SLTs Topic Page Account Codes 251 Non Verified Account Codes 251 Verified Account Codes 252 Attendant Group Calls 253 Busy Override 254 Callback Request 255 Call Forwarding 255 Call Forwarding All Calls 256 Call Forwarding Busy 256 Call Forwarding No Answer 257 Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb 258 Call Hold 259 System Hold 259 Floating Hold Retrieve Only 260
113. 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Extension Name Assignments Extension names can be up to 10 characters in length Assignment of extension names must be allowed in the Extension COS Operation To set extension names using a large display or small display phone Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Press the PROG key 3 Press the key 4 Enter 2 for the Extension Name Assignment mode EXT NO gt EXT NAME displays 5 Enter the extension number 6 Press the HOLD key XXX A B C D E F XXX displays where XXX extension number 7 Press the FLASH key to clear the existing data A B C D E F XXX displays where XXX extension number 8 Enter the extension name If using a large display phone press the soft key next to the desired row of letters See Example 1 on page 52 f using a small display phone press the appropriate one touch key See Example 2 on page 53 9 Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter See Example 1 Large display phone on page 52 See Example 2 Small display phone on page 53 Notes Press the key to erase a single entry Press the ff key to enter a space 10 Repeat steps 7 8 as many times as necessary to enter the desired extension name Note Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry 11 Press the HOLD key when finished Nex
114. 62 for the Night 1 Feature code 3 Press the ON OFF key ON OFF LED goes off Red Night LED goes off Night 2 Mode 1 Press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone ON OFF LED lights 2 Enter 763 for the Night 2 Feature code 3 Press the ON OFF key ON OFF LED goes off Red Night LED goes off Hardware Hequirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations e Day and Night modes can be assigned to FF keys on a phone You can switch between Day 1 Day 2 Night Night 1 and Night 2 modes simply by pressing the appropriate key The FF key lights red when the System is in the assigned mode Alternatively a Day Night toggle mode key can be assigned Pressing the key toggles between modes When in Day mode the FF key LED is not lit When in Night mode the LED lights red Automatic Day Night Mode You can set the System to automatically enter a particular Day Night mode determined by the time of day Each day of the month can be assigned 1 of 3 automatic system mode patterns Each of the patterns can be set to change modes up to 5 times per day Up to 20 special days can be programmed with up to 5 automatic mode changes for the day An Exception Day period is available for overriding the automatic mode for extended periods of time For instance if an office is shut down for the week of July Fourth the System can be programmed to not operate in the automatic mode for those days The System will stay in the same mode for the period T
115. 67 Programing Devices Telephone 59 Programming Devices 59 PC Based Customizing Tool 59 Programming Telephone 59 Progress Tones 27 PSD Names Setting 77 PSD Numbers Setting 76 Q Queuing Point 294 R Redial Last Number DSLT 232 Key Telephone 162 SLT 276 Redial Key Busy Tone DSLT 207 Key Telephone 116 Last Number DSLT 232 Key Telephone 162 RELEASE key 154 Reset Call DSLT 237 Key Telephone 177 SLT 281 Restriction Ext to Ext COS 30 Ringing Alarm 62 BLF 61 Day 60 Delayed 60 DID 32 DIL 33 DISA 33 Distinctive 41 Slide 62 Ringing Line Preference 178 Route List Table 295 Route Table 295 RS Level for Non ARS Routing 292 5 Schedule Setting 91 Security Data 37 Sensor Door Box 43 Separation BGM MOH 25 Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension 104 Set Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail 89 Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension 105 Set Caller ID Logging Extensions 106 Set Day of Week Mode 101 Set Exception Day Mode 99 Set Extension Names 86 Set Message Key ID Code 90 Set Mode Schedule 91 Set PSD Names 77 Set PSD Numbers 76 Set Special Day Mode 93 Set SSD Index 84 Set SSD Names 83 Set SSD Numbers 82 Set System Date Time Day 75 Set Verified ID Codes 87 Set Walking TRS Codes 103 Signal Conversion DP to DTMF DSLT 229 Key Telephone 150 Single Line Telephone SLT Features 249 Slide Ringing 62 SLT Flash Send 274 Small Display Phone Display Information 147 SMDR 63 Output data format 6
116. 78 44 amp Calling Number Hung Up 08 30 Fri Oct 24 Time and Date of Call Answered by Someone Else Call Log Entry Number 01 10 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 137 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation To outdial from the Call Log Action Result 1 Go off hook or press On Off Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the Call Log feature code default CONF 96 Phone enters call log mode 3 Press the following keys to view the call log Move forward in call log Move back in call log 4 To return a call and exit the Call Log Press the left EXEC key to access Access MCO 1 dial 9 dial add digits usually 1 and dial the dis played caller ID number Or Press the right EXEC key to access Access MCO 1 dial 9 and dial the caller ID number To store the Call Log number in a personal speed dial Action Result 1 Go off hook or press On Off Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the Call Log feature code default CONF 96 Phone enters call log mode 3 Press the following keys to view the call log Move forward in call log Move back in call log 4 To store the call log number in a personal speed dial Press PROG the speed dial bin number 80 99 and press the left EXEC key to dial the add digits usually an area code and press HOLD Or Press PROG the speed dial bin number 80
117. A Action Result 1 Replace the handset Your extension rings 2 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF1 0 03 Extension COS OHVA Originate FF1 0 03 Extension COS OHVA Receive FF3 Extension COS Assignments FF4 FF Key Assignments Considerations The held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the OHVA hangs up If the transferred call is not answered immediately it will queue for a set time limit then return to the extension sending the OHVA by transfer recall timer You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA If a Split key is assigned to the extension that receives an OHVA call when an OHVA is being received the Split key blinks green If the split key is pressed during an OHVA call to answer the Split key lights red If the split key is pressed again to terminate the OHVA conversation the Split key extinguishes If you make an OHVA to an SLT the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement One Touch Keys CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description You can use one touch keys to store telephone numbers speed dial numbers or feature access codes To dial the stored number you go offhook and press the desired key Operation To program a one touch key for outside telephone numbers Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2
118. ARS is enabled and the caller dials the first MCO Access Number usually 9 Direct trunk access and the second to fifth MCO Access numbers usually 81 to 84 do not utilize ARS ARS use may be required based on the extension originating the call This is enabled by the Forced ARS extension setting The ARS feature is exceptionally flexible depending on the implementation plan Call routing can consider the day of the year day of the week time of day the originating extension or trunk and the number dialed If the preferred route is busy up to 4 additional routes can be considered When all trunks in a call route are busy the call can optionally be queued to continue trying all trunks while moving to the additional routes Once the trunk group is selected prefix digits can be deleted and digits added In addition digits can be added as a suffix A high cost toll call warning can also be issued before connecting to a high cost trunk giving the caller an opportunity to terminate the call attempt before a higher cost connection is established Both TRS and ARS TRS utilize various tables that are linked together These tables together determine the TRS and ARS TRS operation Data must be collected determining the customer s needs requirements and facilities Then the data must be analyzed to organize a TRS or ARS plan This plan must then be implemented using the appropriate TRS or ARS TRS tables 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 1
119. Busy asses erie orare eee ele 254 CallBack Beq BSLb ia qus eae OR QU e a a CT n EAR D UR 255 Gall Forwarding oes ebrei ed VR Xx eR C Edu FEE EE ERES 255 Call Forwarding All Calls 2 0 0 cee BI 256 Call Forwarding Busy 22b rh 3 err tenes tee e LERRA EIN AIME 256 Call Forwarding No Answer 00 2 2 c eee ees 257 Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb 0 0 00 te 258 2 Bi Rake et ade dk Owe ew ne Ree ee oe 259 System Hold 15 554 cux ddr LER RS RE ademiam pA beam i A Eb 259 Floating Hold Retrieve Only i estero bee eset ee S bed es 260 Exclusive Hold ss kae RUE REX ra NE 261 Broker s et ra Mum etie eh are a EEA ath 261 Call Park iude NEA et E RR EUER CPI Ed RR P ERE S Rd e 262 Gall Certe ba rU I En exce PRA RON ER AE 263 Extension Group Pickup cir ed rho LRL C Ed Eee 263 Extension Direct PickUp ner ect om erra RC XE RA OE ER SEE 264 Trunk Group PICKUP Josue tere dese esas Se IM EE IMS oe 265 Trunk Direct PICKUD REEL Bee es bee ed oe ee tae ONE 266 Call Transfer sisson cae eek kena ae eee eee eee 266 Supervised Tralsier bese pew ERR Ke E 266 Unsupervised TransmBl ox dues woul See ne et es eee ele aed 267 Ca
120. C 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside call Direct Trunk Access MCO Trunk Access 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 243 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Direct Trunk Access Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access to test trunks or to access data trunks Operation To use Direct Trunk Access Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Enter the Direct Trunk Access code default 88 Enter the desired trunk number Outside dial tone See er Dial the phone number Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Direct Trunk Access Extension COS Considerations N A MCO Trunk Access The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group You can seize an idle trunk from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code Operation To seize an idle trunk Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the desired trunk access number 9 or 81 84 See Outside dial tone Table 15 3 Dialthe phone number Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI MCO Access 244 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSL
121. Connected to both parties To use Extension Busy Override Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number Dialed extension number displays Busy tone 3 Enter the Busy Override code default 9 Alert tone sounds to both extensions System programming required Connection to both parties OVR1 name of overriding exten sion and OVR2 extension name for current talk path displays on both extensions Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 01 Splash Tone Busy Override e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Manual DND Override Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Forced DND Override e FF1 2 Dial Plan e Extension COS e Data Security Considerations Youcannot break in on three party conference calls e The default for the Override Alert Tone is off If the Override Alert Tone is enabled the tone will be sent to both parties when a call is overridden 118 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Callback Request CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description If you dial a busy extension Callback Request enables the System to call you back when that extension becomes free When you answer the System automatically rings the called party again Operation To set a Callback Request A
122. D HH MM SS HH MM SS NNNN TTT dddddddddddddddddddddddd dddddddddddddddd aaaaaaaaaa v vvvv CCCCCCCCH 8 Condition Code I Incoming call D DID DDI incoming call h Hold incoming call N Network incoming call S DISA incoming call t Transfer incoming call O Outgoing call Non LCR F Call forward outside call G ARS outgoing call H Hold outgoing call L LCR outgoing call s DISA outgoing call T Transfer outgoing call W Network outgoing call Call start time MM 01 to 12 DD 01 to 31 HH 00 to 23 MM 00 to 59 SS 00 to 59 Call duration time HH 00 to 23 MM 00 to 59 SS 00 to 59 CO user No extension line No 0 to 9999 CO line No 1 to C576 64 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features line No CO line No 1 to 576 When CO line is disconnected while the call is on hold to 576 Dialed No 24 digits max including 0 9 Cannot display Flash or Pause If a number is hidden will appear instead of digits will stay with the call even if the call is transferred For Format 2 an I Proceeds the digits if it is an incoming call Accounting code 10 digits max e Gg Verified Account code Verified Account code table number V001 to V500 Caller data Format 2 only o ISDN charge data Format 2 only originator number applies to ISDN only H Carriage return line feed Related Programm
123. D key A B C D E F PXX displays where PXX PSD number 11 Enter the PSD name If using alarge display phone press the soft key next to the desired row of letters See Example 1 on page 79 e If using a small display phone press the appropriate one touch key See Example 2 on page 80 Note Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data 12 Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter e See Example 1 Large display phone on page 79 e See Example 2 Small display phone on page 80 Notes e Press the key to erase a single entry Press the key to enter a space 13 Repeat steps 11 12 as many times as necessary to enter the desired speed dial name Note Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry 14 Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next PSD bin number displays 15 set additional PSD names press the volume up and Desired PSD bin number displays down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired PSD 16 Repeat steps 11 15 until all PSD names are entered 78 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance Action Result 17 Press the AUTO key to exit the PSD name entry mode Enter PSD XXX displays where XXX extension number OR To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF key 18 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 User MAINT displays OR ON OFF L
124. DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Chapter 6 DSLT Features This chapter describes features that are available with the Digital Single Line Telephone DSLT This chapter covers the following topics Topic Page Digital Single Line Telephone 203 Account Codes 203 Non Verified Account Codes 204 Verified Account Codes 205 Attendant Group Calls 206 Auto Repeat Dial 207 Background Music 207 Busy Override 208 Callback Request 209 Call Forwarding 210 Call Forwarding All Calls 210 Call Forwarding Busy 211 Call Forwarding No Answer 212 To cancel Call Forwarding and DND 213 Call Hold 214 System Hold 214 Floating Hold 215 Exclusive Hold 216 Broker s Hold 217 Call Park 219 Call Pickup 219 Extension Group Pickup 219 Extension Direct Pickup 220 Trunk Group Pickup 221 Trunk Direct Pickup 221 Call Transfer 222 Supervised Transfer 222 Unsupervised Transfer 223 Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension 223 Camp On Call Waiting 224 Conference Calls 226 Three Party Conferencing 226 Eight Party Conferencing 226 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Topic Page Do Not Disturb 228 DP to DTMF Signal Conversion 229 Flash 230 Hot Line 230 Intercom Calling 231 Last Number Redial 232 Message Waiting Callback 232 Onhook Dialing 234 Offhook Signaling 234 Of
125. DISA CO trunk to ring and give off site users dial in access to the System Once the DISA trunk is accessed the user receives dial tone and may dial an extension For more information on DISA see Direct Inward System Access on page 40 Hardware Hequirements e N A Related Programming e N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 33 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Considerations N A Multiple Ringing CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Multiple Ringing allows CO calls into the System to be directed to ring multiple extensions in the System This can be very useful when anyone in a group may answer a call This can also be very useful at night when only a selected number of people are available to handle calls Hardware Hequirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A CO Trunk Interface Description The System supports several types of CO Trunk Interfaces including the following e Direct Inward Dialing DID Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI e ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI e Loop Start and Ground Start Each trunk type supports various features such as Delayed Ringing Night Ringing etc CO Trunk Interface DID The DID feature allows an extension to have a dedicated direct number The dedicated number allows calls to be made directly to the extension without the caller going through the atten
126. Digits Table contains a Prefix ID the system considers all appearances of this Prefix ID to look for an exact match Up to 8 digits are considered in addition to the prefix dial digits Once the system determines an exact match the system determines from this table the number of digits expected to be dialed and the restriction TRS level If the TRS level allows the call to proceed then the route type and its associated pattern number entry index number are followed There are three possible route types the Route Table the Route List Table and the Time List Table 294 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Time List Table Time List Table is used when the time of day the day of week or the date affects the desired route The Time List Table allows up to 50 patterns to be entered Each pattern may specify up to five Route List patterns to used based on the current time of day Up to four Time List tables may be used The referenced time list table is determined by the Special Day Table or the Day of Week Table This is useful when rates change for certain days such as weekend rates versus weekday rates Route List Table The Route List Table is used when there are multiple route possibilities Up to 5 possible route table patterns may be considered in sequential priority when attempting to find an available trunk Before a route is tried the system compares the
127. ED goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Example 1 Large display phone To enter D a Press the first soft key on the top left b Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row ABCDEF GHIJKL STUVWX 2 abcdef ghijkl MNOPQR stuvwx yz amp sp 00000 MSG CONF PREV 9 y 5 J A NEXT PROG y 4 la ee ee lam To enter 0 a Press the third soft key from the top right 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 79 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation b Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row CO ABCDEF abcdef e GHIJKL ghijkl e MNOPQR STUVWX stuvwx CX e yz amp sp MSG CONF PREV NEXT C cC o lt C O j X PROG jla jm j jm a Jla Example 2 Small display phone Refer to the following diagram to determine which one touch key to press abcdef C ghijkl D mnopar Cstuvwx Cyz amp sp ABCDEF GHIJKL MNOPQR GTUVWX C Yz To enter D a Press the first one touch key from the left on the bottom row 80 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700
128. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 723 For another extension enter 743 3 If setting Call Forwarding for another extension dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward 4 Dialthe destination number If forwarding to another extension dial the extension number If forwarding to an outside number press the key then enter the SSD bin number Note Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programed into speed dialing For information see Speed Dialing on page 179 5 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 122 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To cancel Call Forwarding No Answer Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 733 For another extension enter 753 3 If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension dial the extension number 4 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Call Forwarding All Calls and Do Not Disturb The System allows you to cancel both Call Forwarding All Calls and Do Not Disturb DND for your own extension in one step Operation To cancel Call Forwarding All Calls and DND Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF
129. Extension Interface 43 Digital Key Telephones 43 Analog Device Capability 44 DP DTMF Single Line Telephones SLTs 44 ISDN BRI S Point Interface 44 ISDN PRI S Point Interface 45 Flexible Numbering Plan 45 Free Slot 46 Hunting Groups 46 Internal Hold Tone 48 MCO Tenant Group 48 Memory Backup 49 Music on Hold 50 Name Assignments 50 Extension Name Assignments 51 Speed Dial Name Assignments 54 Network Facilities 56 Network Call Transfer 57 Network Extension Calling 57 Network Paging 57 Network Call Routing 57 Tandem Connection 57 Non Blocking Architecture 57 Power Failure Transfer 58 Power On Maintenance 58 Programming Devices 59 PC Based Customizing Tool 59 20 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Topic Page Ringing Modes 59 Day 1 Day 2 Night Ringing 60 Day 1 Day 2 Night Delayed Ringing 60 DID Day Night Ringing 61 DID Day Night Busy Delayed Ringing 61 Busy Lamp Field Ringing 61 Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing 62 Slide Ringing 62 Alarm Ringing 62 SSD TRS Override 63 Station Message Detail Recording 63 Trunk Access Groups 66 Virtual Port 67 Virtual Port used for Floating Hold 67 Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension 67 Voice Mail Integration Third Party 68 Answer Supervision for Voice Mail 68 Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail 68 DID DNIS DDI Voice Mail ID Code 69 High Priority Message Waiting 70 Message Key ID Cod
130. F1 0 03 Extension COS 8 party Conference Extension COS Broker s Hold or Conference Considerations e A Conference Card VB 44120 must be installed in the System in order to use Eight party Conferencing e Broker s Hold must be disabled to establish a conference call e If the originating party hangs up the conference call will be disconnected If any other party hangs up the conference call will remain in progress Do Not Disturb DND CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do Not Disturb DND feature When DND is activated calls to that extension receive busy tone You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension Operation To set DND for your own extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the DND Set code default 720 3 Replace the handset To cancel DND for your own extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the DND Cancel code default 720 DND CD LED light goes off 3 Replace the handset 272 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features To set DND for another extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code default 740 3 Dial the
131. FI1 0 19 TRS Class for Verified Account Code e FFI 2 Dial Plan e FF8 1 04 Verified Account Codes Considerations N A Attendant Group Calls CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialing the designated attendant number Operation To call an attendant group Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the attendant pilot number default 0 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan e FF3 0 Extension Number e FF5 0 Attendant Hunt Groups Considerations e Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 253 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation attendant pilot number is flexible Ifamember of an attendant group is for a virtual extension multiple extensions in the attendant group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialed e Attendant calls are always tone calls 1 not voice calls Busy Override CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Busy Override allows you to break into another user s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent information or to create three party conference calls Operation To set Extension Busy Override Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the exten
132. Handsfree dk ya xx RE Y 158 Handsfree Operation 3 2 Cad 158 Headset Operation 4 ai ete eae eee eee Sa 159 Hot Dial Pad cei wkd ee ew eee 160 Considerations a beta pees Lew ter atten wey ohare s beide See 160 Hot cece an ieee ee ae ee ee 160 Intercom Calling Lia Se aoi ene dea C de rr det icu dor dicc ad Ee dea 161 Last Number Redial icin x rre trae agii Cen Yo eed aca e dh RR 162 Line Appearances ca 2d xe a ance gei GR ado me bot D e no Eee OE CR e 163 DSS BLF Appearances ess cq avi sbi edo pee esp awed ee eh bee ee ee 163 Direct Line Appearances sue tries ed xp ee tte et 165 6 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 1 1 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Contents Multi CO MCO Appearances i sad cR RR lay Oe eee Pee RE 165 Message Key ice wets bel eke ee ee Rh eee eee ele 166 Message Waiting Callback 167 Mute FuncllOn X RR ERS RORCR ee es 169 Oflliook 25 ee qe Roe Roe na no RR e ERN ROS QUON UE ue c xS RR 170 Offhook Signaling sk dae E30 a enn CR OR ER Ge RC Re CR 170 Offhook Voice Announce 6 66 sii emer eS dee eee x OR X lene nnn 171 One Touch Keys isc ioe sek RERO ra EV ERE rack E REOR Rae ac aL 173 On
133. Is the originator ARS Deny the call Level less than the first Deny the call priority ARS Level Yes Route List Pattem Is there an available Y Is Waming Issue Warning Tone trunk in the listed 8 ivamng tone io bonam route enabled Yes ig No No Yes System modifies 3 ls there an associated outdialed digits Is Queuing Point ue i an digit modify table entry Yes per Digit Modify enabled Ves run eginning wi Table first priority route No No The system connects to Has the Queuing trunk and outdials all Yes Timer expired collected digits modified as specified ls this the last Yes D he call Priority Level entry eny the cal Has the Max of System collects and Following Digits outdials a digit No been outdialed Is the originator ARS Level less than the next Deny the call priority ARS Level Yes No more digits outdialed 308 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation If the analyze digits table is referenced by a prefix ID the system will consider at all entries with the prefix ID and analyze any additional digits dialed The system looks for the longest exact match If there is an exact match the system compares the entered TRS Restriction value to the call originator s assigned TRS level If the Restriction value is equal to or greater than the originator s TRS level the call is denied Otherwise the route type and associated pattern ar
134. M 1210 1212 1214 1216 1218 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A Set Exception Day Mode Description 1211 1213 1215 1217 1219 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 99 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation For a description of Automatic Day Night System Mode see Automatic Day Night Mode on page 39 You can specify exception days which allow for a range of days for the System to operate in the Night mode This is intended for extended holidays for business shut down periods that last for multiple days You can specify up to 6 exception day periods Operation To set the Exception Day Modes Action Result 1 Ifnot already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main 81 tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on User MAINT displays page 75 2 At the 81 level enter 07 3 Press the HOLD key 8107 System Mode displays 4 Enter 2 5 Press the HOLD key 2 Mode Except Day displays 6 Press the HOLD key 200 MMDD PTN 1 Start Day displays 7 Enter the start date by month two characters and day two characters for Exception Period 1 Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key 8 Press the HOLD key 201 MMDD PTN 1 Stop Day displays
135. NEXT At menu level moves to the next screen At data entry ignored VOLUME W Scrolls through the same address level ascending VOLUME A Scrolls through the same address level descending FF1 Moves to Personal Speed Dial PSD Assignment menu FF2 Moves to System Speed Dial SSD Assignment menu FF3 Moves to Extension Name menu FF4 Moves to Verified ID Code menu FF5 Moves to Call Forward ID Code menu FF6 Moves to Message Key ID Code menu FF7 Moves to System Mode menu 74 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance Note Once in a data entry level you must either enter an acceptable value or restore the previous value before proceeding For instance if you change an entry to an unacceptable value and then press FF1 to move to the PSD Assignment menu you will not be able to proceed You must first enter an acceptable value Operation To enter User Maintenance mode Action Result 1 Ata telephone with a COS that allows user login press the ON OFF key 2 Press the PROG key 3 Press the key twice 4 Press the CONF key 81 User MAINT displays Note Your extension s Class of Service must be properly set to allow User Maintenance access Also only one user may enter User Maintenance or System Programming at a time Set System Date Time Day Description The System allows you to change the date time and
136. Name 42 Assignment MCO 1 Access initial setting 9 43 9 2 Access initial setting 81 44 81 156 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Fixed Feature Code Default Flexible Feature Code Feature Description additional digits to program into if not listed must use Fixed Feature key Code MCO 3 Access initial setting 82 45 82 MCO 4 Access initial setting 83 46 83 MCO 5 Access initial setting 84 47 84 Callback at Busy Tone 49 Camp on at Busy Tone 50 Message Waiting Set at Busy Tone 5 Message Waiting Priority Set at Busy x52 Tone Busy Override Set 53 Voice Call Tone Call Toggle 54 Message Waiting Set at Ringback x55 Tone Message Waiting Priority Set at x56 Ringback Tone Account Code Entry 57 8 8 Party Conference 58 788 Extension Port Confirm 59 Trunk Port Confirm 60 VM Transfer Key 1 74 Ext No 0 9999 VM Transfer Key 2 75 Ext No 0 9999 Variable Mode 61 Call Logging Confirmation Mode Start x62 Station Call Park Hold Answer 63 Station Call Park Hold 64 771 Station Call Park Answer Own Ext 5 772 Station Call Park Answer Other Ext 66 773 Station Call Park Transfer 67 774 Release Key 68 Answer Key 69 OHVA Key 70 Split Key 71 Walking TRS Key 72 ANY Key 8 Up to 4 digits O 9
137. OS Considerations The Handsfree Answerback feature can be used to respond to only voice calls from other extensions not tone calls e Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling Last Number Redial CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialed by pressing the REDIAL key Operation 162 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To automatically redial the last number dialed Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Outside dial tone OR CO XXX displays where XXX trunk number Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code 2 Press the REDIAL key Last number dialed displays 3 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON Line key LED turns red then goes off OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Intercom Redialing Extension COS Considerations e Extension Class of Service COS determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both intercom and CO calls or CO calls only Line Appearances CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description The System provides three types of line appearances e Direct Station Select DSS Busy Lamp Field BLF Appearances e Dir
138. Other Phone code default 2 740 Enter DND EXT displays Dial the extension number DND Set displays on affected extension Sede Replace the handset press the ON OFF key To cancel DND for another extension Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code default 750 Enter DND EXT displays Dial the extension number DND Cleared displays Anges Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Manual DND Override Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Forced DND Override e FF1 0 03 Extension COS DND Set Clear e FF1 0 03 Extension COS DND Set Clear Other e FF1 2 Dial Plan e FF3 Extension COS Considerations Forced DND override is available e DND override function is available by Busy Override code 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 149 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation DP to DTMF Signal Conversion CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Dial Pulse DP to Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF Signal Conversion allows you to switch from DP to DTMF signaling when using a DP trunk For instance if you dial into a Voice Mail system using a DP trunk you can switch to DTMF signaling to communicate with the Voic
139. Panasonic Ji A 7 x Digital Business System Technical Manual Section 700 Feature Operation 524X07801B Issued 6 11 98 x Warning This service information is designed for experienced repair techni cians only and is not designed for use by the general public It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product Products powered by electricity should be ser viced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians Any attempt to service or repair the product or products dealt with in this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death FCC Warning This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to radio commu nications This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take necessary measures to correct the interference Battery Recyclin
140. Press the key Verified Account Codes Stations restricted from outside call origination by Toll Restriction Service TRS can be allowed to make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS After a call is made the SMDR record for the call will show the verified account code Operation To make an outside call that requires an account code Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the Verified Account ID code default 8 Enter the Account Code 10 digits Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code eu dep wee Dial the phone number Hardware Requirements e An SMDR printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code records Related Programming e FF1 0 19 TRS Class for Forced Account Code e FF1 2 Dial Plan Forced Account e FF3 Verified Account e FF8 1 04 Verified Account Codes with TRS Class Considerations e Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built In Voice Mail e Even though up to 10 digits may be entered the system verifies the ID based on the first 4 digits only e Account codes will be cancelled after using CO queuing 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 205 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Account Codes interact with TRS as shown in the following table
141. Press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the phone number Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A Paging CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements Internal pages are made via the System s key telephone speakers External pages are made through the speakers of an external paging system connec Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet Me Answer feature Operation To make a page ted to the System Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the Group Paging code default Enter the number of the desired paging group 0 9 Make your announcement C al ES Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 176 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Meet Me Answer To answer a page using Meet Me Answer Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Meet Me Answer code default Connected to specified party Hardware Requirements External relays amplifier and speakers are required for external paging Related Programming FF1 0 02 Paging Override FF1 0 03 Extension COS Paging FF1 0
142. Requirements N A Related Programming e FFI 0 26 DISA Incoming Code e FF1 0 26 DISA Outgoing Codes and TRS Assignments e FF1 0 04 Class of Service DISA ID Check e FF2 Ring Type Considerations e Busy override cannot be used for a DISA line e DISA can be used to access extensions as well as outside numbers Paging cannot be accessed from a DISA line e While dialing an extension number the key may be entered to cancel dialing and return to dial tone The key may be entered to disconnect Distinctive Ringing Description Distinctive Ringing sets CO calls to ring with a distinctive ring based on the trunk This ring also identifies the call as an outside call instead of an inside call 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 41 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Door Box Description The door box also called door phone allows visitors to announce their presence from the office door etc When the button on the door box is pressed one or more phones ring in the System When answered a two way conversation is made between the door box and the answering phone The answering party can operate a connected door opener if equipped Operation To answer a door box Action Result 1 Answer the door box Door box calls ring in on a dedicated Two way conversation possible FF key 2
143. S see above TRS Class ARS Routing TRS Level For each of the 50 TRS classes a TRS Level of 0 9 may be assigned This is not done on a Trunk group basis since the ARS system determines the trunk group used When a call is originated this TRS value is used to determine the originator s TRS level From the dialed digits a restriction TRS level 0 8 is determined If the originator s TRS level does not exceed the restriction TRS level the call is restricted The higher the originator s TRS level the less the restriction If the originator s TRS level is 0 no outside calls are allowed If the originator s TRS level is 9 all outside calls are allowed since this will always exceed the restriction TRS value maximum of 8 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 293 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation Dialing Analysis ARS Level An ARS level is also assigned to each of the 50 TRS classes This originator s ARS value is used to determine if the caller can proceed to use a particular priority route based on the associated ARS requirement in the Route List described later The originator s ARS value may be 0 9 where the higher number allows more calling access Queuing Point The Route List provides up to 5 route possibilities for handling a call Each route is considered in a sequential order When the Queuing Point is set to operate the system will search all previously considered r
144. S 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Speed Dial Name Assignments You can assign names to PSD numbers from a key telephone without entering the programming mode If allowed in the Extension Class of Service COS you can also assign names to SSD numbers PSD names can contain a maximum of 7 characters SSD names can contain a maximum of 16 characters Operation PSD Names To set PSD names using a large display or small display phone Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key 2 Press the PROG key 3 Press the key 4 Enter 0 for the PSD Name Assignment mode ABCDEF P80 displays where P80 PSD bin 80 5 Press the up or down arrow key to display the desired PSD A B C D E F PXX displays where PXX bin number desired PSD bin number 6 Enter the extension name If using a large display phone press the soft key next to the desired row of letters See Example 1 on page 186 f using a small display phone press the appropriate one touch key See Example 2 on page 188 Note Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data 7 Usethe bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter See Example 1 Large display phone on page 186 See Example 2 Small display phone on page 188 Notes Press the key to erase a single entry Press the ff key t
145. SA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Meet Me Answer To answer a page using Meet Me Answer Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Meet Me Answer code default Connected to specified party Hardware Requirements e External relays amplifier and speakers are required for external paging Related Programming e FF1 0 02 Paging Override e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Paging e FF1 0 04 Trunk COS Paging e FFI 2 Dial Plan e FF2 Trunk COS Extension COS Considerations e Ifan external paging system has been connected pages can be made to paging groups 0 9 through the external speakers Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0 9 e An extension can belong to more than one paging group e Only one page may be performed at a time If you attempt to make a page while another extension is paging you will receive a busy signal Reset Call CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description If you dial a busy extension the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply pressing the last digit of the new extension number Operation To use Reset Call to dial another extension after a busy extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dialan extension number Busy tone 3 Dial t
146. Special Day 9 VALUES MMDD or 0 5 Date MMDD 1st MODE 1055 ADDRESS NOs 1000 1219 2nd MODE MODES 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE Start Time HHMM 1056 1058 1060 1062 1064 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1057 1066 1059 1061 1063 1065 Start Time HHMM 1067 1069 1071 1073 1075 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1068 1077 1070 1072 1074 1076 Start Time HHMM 1078 1080 1082 1084 1086 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Date MMDD 1079 1088 1081 1083 1085 1087 Start Time HHMM 1089 1091 1093 1095 1097 Mode 0 5 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 1090 1092 1094 1096 1098 96 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance 8107 1 1000 1219 Hold MMDD or HHMM or 0 5 Hold Special Day 10 Special Day 11 Special Day 12 Special Day 13 VALUES MMDD or 0 5 Date MMDD 1st MODE 1099 ADDRESS NOs 1000 1219 2nd MODE MODES 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE Start Time HHMM
147. T Features Operation To place a call on System Hold Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone To retrieve a call placed on System Hold Action Result 1 Press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code default 0 3 Enter the trunk number Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 01 Floating Hold by HOLD Key e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Hold Key Operation e Extension COS Considerations N A Floating Hold Floating Hold is a type of System Hold that allows you to retrieve a held call from any extension by dialing the Floating Hold orbit number for the held call Floating Hold is useful when the intended recipient of a call must be located via a page The call can be placed in a Floating Hold orbit and that orbit number announced during the page The paged party can then pick up the call by dialing the orbit number Operation To place a call on Floating Hold Action Result 1 Press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 215 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation To retrieve a call from Floating Hold Action Result 1 Enter the Floating H
148. T Features e FF1 2 Dial Plan e FF5 2 MCO Trunk Group Outbound e FF7 ARS TRS Considerations e System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six cabinet configuration These lines can be divided into 99 different trunk groups e Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes System defaults for trunk access codes are displayed in the following table e MCOI can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature e MCOI access code is used for Automatic Route Selection ARS access code Table 15 MCO Trunk Access Codes MCO Group Trunk Access Code MCOI 9 MCO2 81 MCO3 82 MCO4 83 5 84 Trunk Queuing CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description When you try to originate a call by MCO enter 9 and all outside lines in a trunk group are busy the System can call you when a line becomes free Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings Operation To set Trunk Queuing Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter a trunk access code 9 or 81 84 Busy tone 3 Enter the Callback Request code default 3 4 Press the ON OFF key 5 Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 245 Chapter 6 DSLT
149. TRS level for the trunk group selected When the call is dialed the system collects the digits and compares the leading digits to the leading digits table entry The system will look for the longest available exact match A may be entered as a wild card for any digit position If an exact match is found the system will look to see if there is a Prefix ID If so it will jump to the analyze digits table If not the system will compare the entered TRS Restriction value to the call originator s assigned TRS level If the originator s TRS level is not greater than the Restriction TRS level the call is denied Otherwise the call is allowed to proceed 296 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Figure A 6 TRS Flowchart Extension or trunk System checks originating accesses trunk ext or trunk TRS Class User dials digit System checks class assignment for TRS level for this trunk group Origination TRS Level System compares dialed digit s to Are additional Leading Digits digits required ix Di 2 Table Prefix Dial No exact for match entries match Is there a Prefix ID entry in Leading Digits Table Yes Wait for user to dial additional digit System compares additional digit s to Are additional System checks Restriction Analyze Digits Table digits required TRS Level in Leading Digit Prefix Dial entries No Match for match Table No Allow call
150. Table 7 Priority of outgoing call condition codes Priority Dod Description Highest TorH T Outgoing Transfer Call H Outgoing Hold Call 2nd F F Call Forward Outside Call 3rd W W z Network Outgoing Call 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 63 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Priority SET Description Ath L L LCR Outgoing Call Lowest O O Outgoing Call For example an outgoing call is an ARS Outgoing call G but it is also a transferred call The SMDR data condition code will be T to indicate that the call was an Outgoing Transfer A transferred call s condition code takes precedence over the type of call ARS Outgoing call G Table 8 Priority of incoming call condition codes NE Condition d Priority Code Description Highest hort h Incoming Hold t Incoming Transfer 2nd D N orS D DID DDI Incoming Call N Network Incoming Call S DISA Incoming Call Lowest I I Incoming Call For example an incoming call is a DID DDI Incoming call D but it is also a transferred call The SMDR data condition code will be t to indicate that the call was an Incoming Transfer call A transferred call s condition code takes precedence over the type of call DID DDI Incoming call D Figure 1 Output data format Format 1 I MM DD HH MM SS HH MM SS NNNN TTT dddddddddddddddddddddddd aaaaaaaaaa vvvvvH Format 2 T MM D
151. X N A 5551212 1NXX5551212 N A 800 1800XXXXXXX N A 888 1888XXXXXXX N A 900 1900X XXXXXX N A KKK INXXXXXX N A KKK 0XXXX Collect Call 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 305 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation ARS Configuration and Operation This section provides the following An overview of ARS Anexample ARS configuration e Worksheets for planning and implementing an ARS plan ARS TRS Programming Operation Overview The purpose of TRS is to restrict outside call origination based on the dialed number and the originator The purpose of ARS is to automatically select the lowest cost route available for a call based on the dialed number The system allows separate TRS operation or TRS operation concurrent with ARS operation TRS only operation is described in the previous section of this appendix The TRS portion of ARS TRS works in the same manner As shown in Figure A 5 ARS TRS Operation found at the end of this appendix up to 50 TRS ARS Class Settings are assigned When a call is originated several general settings for the originator are always considered Digit Restriction This is the maximum number of digits that can be dialed Incoming Dialing Restriction If this is enable an outside call cannot be originated during an incoming call Outgoing SSD Dialing Re
152. a 24 key console that can be attached to a key telephone The 24 keys on the EM 24 can be programmed as Direct Station Select DSS keys for internal lines In addition to providing direct station selection the DSS keys also provide Busy Lamp Fields BLFs that allow you to monitor the status of other extensions The LED lights red when the assigned extension is busy and lights green when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb DND are activated For additional information see Flexible Function Keys on page 152 Hardware Requirements e VB 44310 Related Programming FF4 FF Key Assignment Considerations N A Flash CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description You can send a flash signal on your telephone to release an outside line and then either automatically reseize the same outside line or switch to extension dial tone status by pressing the FLASH or PROG key Trunk programming determines whether your phone reseizes the outside line or switches to extension dial tone status Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI I Flash Timer e FF2 Flash Pattern 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 151 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation e FE2 Flash Key Operation Flash on PROG Recall Considerations You can send a longer or shorter flash signal depending on whether you use the FLASH or PROG key flash tone lengths are set for the FLASH and PROG
153. ab agente atte de s CRI AIR SET eds eee eru eeu 57 Tandem Connection iua RR bee eee ea ERA ERES SES e iba te 57 Non Blocking Architecture 0 000s 57 Power Failure Transfer 0 00 e cece eee eee eee eee 58 Power 0 0 0 58 Programming DeViC S ois cee ce 59 Telephone Programming bes ee 59 PC Based Customizing Tool 2e ste ded 2 OA PORES SONUS IS Salata es 59 RINGING norris Lad abad QE d bd das ERR Io Ra a os 59 Day 1 Day 2 Night RINGING 252 ou detras V ES EAM E REM eee UE pe TEES 60 Day 1 Day 2 Night Delayed Ringing llle 60 DID Day Night RINGING 61 DID Day Night Busy Delayed Ringing llle 61 Busy Lamp Field uam ut tup Deg edd ota t ans 61 Busy Lamp Field Delayed 62 Slide RINGING cues eek ke ee hri te eee Bee Siege Sle Bt 62 Alarm RINGING uenisse elec ies aca ee ee ete Se 62 SSD THS OVG6Iiide cw xe eco ie RR Rea D cae en QR uw Ec 63 Station Message Detail 63 Foll Restriction ServiCa8 cic vr ska daa kd dA ea Pewee ade OR ETE 65
154. ace aca o Bg Vno eq ce abd ues daba eee 219 Extension Group Pickup ee ed ated pa sda cM S MEME Ra s 219 Extension Direct 5e eor e TUE RE RC IET RE eae cls Peek 220 Tank GIOUD TIO suo ori a Ces fet acere epa ur 221 Trunk Direct Pickup s uk mde EATER Ee tS dg ed REESE Pee Peewee 221 Call Oe abe ewe E e 222 Supervised Transier a ium eng eb REN Rad ba REA RI AG UE 222 Unsupervised Transfer s 1 5 RR tor SHE CRETA RR eg dee ot enge s 223 Camping Call Onto a Busy 223 Camp On Gall Waiting ee Yr Ea acra Ex Rea Xara 224 Conterence Calls ced d e Er aic ck dor ER cR eee ee bane cadence 226 Three Party Conferencing RR REIS Gene ee REOR AE Ye 226 Eight Party Conferencing deu aH E REA eA eee See eee RAM e 226 Do Not DIStUIbD coz oki ko on ER ECC RR Cn walk een Gunes 228 DP to DTMF Signal Conversion 229 aC Lee ee et nnn eee el a D c e 230 Hot LING irae tae ex PE Kee bt we ee es Mate wt 230 Intercom Calling a 231 Last Number essa cei etre cee 4 teat aw Ya 232 Message Waiting Callback 232 Onhook Dialing nse nao hte Mena Na wile ee ae eee eave 234 Offhobk
155. addition to ARS levels 0 2 access allows high cost long distance trunk access In addition to ARS levels 0 and 1 access allows medium cost long distance trunk access In addition to ARS levels 0 access allows local call access Allows Birmingham sister store FX ARS access only 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 317 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation 4 Next the Origination TRS and ARS level and queuing point enable disable operation is determined for each class Using Table 7 Example User Needs Worksheet on page 314 each unique origination class is listed Using Table 9 Example Origination TRS Level Plan on page 316 the TRS Level is determined for each class Using Table 8 Example MCO Tenant Trunk Groups Worksheet on page 315 and Table 10 Example Origination ARS Level Plan on page 317 the ARS level is determined for each class In this example we enable Queuing Point so that the system will continuously check for the availability of a lower cost trunk before selecting a higher cost trunk Table A 11 Example Origination TRS ARS Class to Level Worksheet Origination TRS Class Origination TRS ARS Level 0 9 Class User Type s TRS Level ARS Level Queuing Number Executive Office Point loading dock Continue Executive Day Night 9 3 Y 1 Attendant Day Buyers Day Night 4 3 Y 2 General Office Day 3
156. al Conference Card is installed up to 8 parties can participate in a conference call The System supports the following types of Conference Calls e Three Party Conferencing e Eight Party Conferencing Three Party Conferencing The System supports the following types of three party conference calls 3 extensions 2 extensions and 1 CO line 1 extension and 2 CO lines Operation To establish a Three party Conference Call Action Result 1 While on a call hookflash to place the current call on hold Current call on hold 2 Enter a trunk access code or dial the number of the exten sion you wish to add to the call 3 If you entered a trunk access code dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call Otherwise proceed to step 4 4 Hookflash Connected to party 5 To add another party to the call repeat steps 1 4 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI I System Timers Trunk to Trunk 270 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Broker s Hold or Conference e Extension COS Considerations Broker s Hold must be disabled to establish a conference call Eight Party Conferencing With the optional Conference Card installed up to 8 parties can be included in a conference call One of the parties can be a CO line i e 8 extensions or 7 extensions and 1
157. al number simply by lifting the handset You do not have to dial any digits Operation To immediately connect to a pre assigned extension or speed dial number Action Result 1 Lift the handset Automatically connected to pre assigned extension or speed dial number Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan e FF5 5 Hot Line Considerations 274 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features N A Intercom Calling CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The System provides two methods of intercom calling e Voice Calling Extension calls are connected immediately without a ringing tone Tone Calling A ringing tone is sent to the called extension Extension Class of Service COS programming determines whether the default for the originating extension is voice or tone calling Regardless of the default you can toggle between voice or tone calling by entering the Tone Voice Call feature code For example if the extension default is tone calling you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone Voice Call feature access code Operation To make a call using Intercom Calling Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number 3 If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to make a voice call enter 1 Or if your extension is set for voice call a
158. al the number at set intervals until the called number answers the caller hangs up or the maximum of 15 redial attempts is made Operation To use Auto Repeat Dial Action Result 1 Press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code CO Key LED lights 3 Dial the phone number Dialed phone number displays Busy tone 4 Press the REDIAL key System automatically redials number Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Auto Repeat Dial Extension COS Assignment Considerations N A Background Music CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 AII Versions Description If your System is set up to provide Background Music music can be played from the speakers of idle telephones If a call is made to an extension receiving Background Music the music stops and the phone rings Background Music is also interrupted when the phone goes offhook The System can also provide Music on Hold MOH using a separate music source If MOH is provided callers automatically hear music when they are placed on hold For more information on MOH see page 50 116 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Operation To turn Background Music on Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Background Music
159. all Forward No Answer destination A manual camp on to a busy extension will not forward If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set calls immediately forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination Call Hold CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The system provides the following types of Call Hold System Hold Floating Hold Retrieve Only Exclusive Hold Broker s Hold Call Park Station System Hold You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold You can retrieve a call placed on System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call Operation To place a call on System Hold Action Result 1 While on a call hookflash Intercom dial tone To retrieve a call placed on System Hold Action Result 1 If onhook go offhook Intercom dial tone 2 Hookflash Retrieve call 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 259 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code default 0 3 Enter the trunk number Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Hookflash Operation for SLT e FF3 0 Extension COS Considerations N A Floating Hold Retrieve Only Floating
160. all Forwarding Busy Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 732 For another extension enter 752 3 If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension dial the extension number 4 Replace the handset Call Forwarding No Answer When Call Forwarding No Answer is set a call will ring until the Call forward No Answer timer expires When the timer expires the unanswered call is forwarded To set Call Forwarding No Answer Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 723 For another extension enter 743 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 257 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Action Result 3 If setting Call Forwarding for another extension dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward 4 Dial the destination number If forwarding to another extension dial the extension number If forwarding to an outside number press the key then enter the SSD bin number Note Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programed into speed dialing For instructions see Speed Dialing on page 276 5 Replace the handset To cancel Call Forwarding No Answer Action Res
161. an be very useful in alerting others to pick up unanswered calls Hardware Hequirements e N A 62 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Related Programming e FF2 Trunk Programming Alarm Ringing e FFI11 02 Slide Alarm Ringing Timer Considerations e If slide ringing is enabled it will override alarm ringing SSD TRS Override Description System Speed Dial SSD numbers may be used to outdial calls from extensions that otherwise have outgoing call restrictions i e Toll Restriction Service TRS Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A Station Message Detail Recording Description Station Message Detail Recording SMDR provides detailed call records of outgoing calls SMDR records can be output to a printer or an external call accounting system Various types of information are reported on the SMDR record and each type of information occupies a set position in the SMDR format See Figure 1 on page 64 One type of information is the condition code which occupies the first position in the output format This code specifies what type of call was made or received e g DISA Incoming call S or Outgoing Network call W However condition codes are prioritized and the type of call determines what code is displayed The following tables shows the priority of condition codes for outgoing calls and incoming calls
162. arty conference call from your current call Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key or the line key of your Extension number outside line number current call or name of held party displays 2 Enter the Eight Party Conference code default 788 3 Press the HOLD key 4 Dial the number of the extension you wish to add to the call Note One outside party can be included 5 If you accessed an outside line in step 4 dial the number of Dialed number displays the party you wish to add to the call Otherwise proceed to step 6 6 Press the CONF key when your call is answered Connected to called party 7 To add additional parties to the call repeat steps 3 6 Hardware Requirements 144 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS 8 Party Conference e Extension COS Considerations e A Conference Card VB 44120 must be installed in the System in order to use Eight Party Conferencing e Ifthe originating party hangs up the conference call will be disconnected If any other party hangs up the conference call will remain in progress Display Information CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 AII Versions Description Key telephones with a Liquid Crystal Display LCD reflect the following information e Day and time in 12 or 24 hour format e
163. ary access an outside line Outside dial tone 3 Press the AUTO key OR Enter the Speed Dial Originate code default 2 80 4 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 000 799 5 Complete call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 240 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features To delete an SSD number Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 799 Press the HOLD key S 5 ops Replace the handset press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF1 0 15 16 amp 17 SSD Blocks FF1 0 02 SSD Digits FF1 0 03 Extension COS SSD Assignment FF8 1 02 SSD Number FF8 1 02 SSD Name Considerations The system can be programmed to allow SSD Numbers to override toll restrictions Speed Dial Linking You can automatically link together up to 5 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers longer than 24 characters You can then dial the entire number by pressing the programmed PSD key or by entering the speed dial bin number Alternatively any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the keys in the desired sequence This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier access
164. ated Programming e N A Considerations N A Call Park You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call even if you cannot locate the intended recipient of the call CO Extension and Network calls may be parked There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the DBS 576 One way is to park the call at the receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialing the park answer code plus the parking extension number The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call Operation To park a call on this extension Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Current call on hold 2 Enter the Call Park Hold access code default 771 3 If necessary page the party that needs to retrieve the call 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 217 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Call Park Answer Other Ext access code default 773 3 Dial the number of the extension that parked the call Connected to parked call To park a call at another extension Action Result 1 Press the HOLD key Current call on hold 2 Enter the Call Park Transf
165. atures 293 ARS TRS Programming Operation Overview 306 Attendant Group Calls DSLT 206 Key Telephone 115 SLT 253 Attendant Groups System 22 Auto Repeat Dial DSLT 207 Key Telephone 116 Automatic Call Distributor ACD 23 Automatic Call Waiting Camp on DSLT 224 Key Telephone 141 SLT 269 Automatic Day Night Mode 39 Automatic Route Selection 291 Automatic Route Selection ARS 24 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer 25 B Background Music DSLT 207 Key Telephone 116 System 25 Background Music MOH Separation 25 Backup Battery 25 Memory 49 Battery Backup 25 BGM MOH Separation 25 Blocking Outgoing Audio Mute Function 169 Box Door 42 Broker s Hold DSLT 217 Key Telephone 127 SLT 261 Building Block Expansion Capability 26 Built In Voice Processing Unit 26 Busy Lamp Field BLF Ringing 61 Busy Override DSLT 208 Key Telephone 117 SLT 254 C Call Forward Busy Destination Extension Setting 104 Call Forward ID Code Voice Mail Third Party 68 Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension Setting 105 Call Forwarding All Calls DSLT 210 Key Telephone 120 SLT 256 Busy DSLT 211 Key Telephone 121 SLT 258 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 325 Index Section 700 Operation Do Not Disturb DSLT 213 Key Telephone 123 SLT 258 DSLT 210 Key Telephone 120 No Answer DSLT 211 Key Telephone 122 SLT 257 SLT 255 Call Hold Broker s Hold DSLT 217 Key Telephone 127 SLT 261 DSLT 214 E
166. back Request code default 3 4 Press the ON OFF key Wait CBK TRK displays 5 Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Outside dial tone CO XXX displays where XXX line number Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Trunk Queuing FF3 Extension COS Considerations e Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be canceled e The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make a call using the MCO Trunk Access feature 194 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Variable Mode CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Variable Mode allows you to use the soft keys on a display phone to access selected features when your phone is in the following state e While receiving intercom Dial Tone or during dialing up to 10 functions e While receiving intercom ringback tone up to 5 functions e While receiving intercom busy tone up to 10 functions While talking in intercom mode during CO seizure or during CO talk up to 5 functions Each extension may have customized soft key features available The customization must be programmed by the dealer To access the feature besi
167. ber Start Route Start Route Start Route Start Route Start Route 1 500 Time List Time List Time List Time List Time List 1 0000 1 2 0000 3 3 0000 5 10 322 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Each Route List Pattern consists of a one or more trunk groups in sequence to check for an available trunk Before a route is considered the required ARS level is compared to the originator s ARS level If the originator s ARS level is greater than or equal to the required ARS level the trunk group listed for the route will be searched for an available trunk If no trunk is found the system will attempt to use the next priority route In this example for Pattern 1 the system will first compare the Priority 1 ARS level for the call If it is determined that the ARS level is acceptable the system looks at the route 4 FX trunk group If there is an available trunk the system completes the call If no FX trunk is available during the queuing time the system checks the ARS level for Priority 2 If acceptable since Queuing Point is enabled the system will first attempt to find an available Priority 1 trunk and then attempt to find a Priority 2 WATS trunk If a Priority 2 trunk is found the system will first check to see if Warning Tone is set to Yes In this example there is no warning tone If Yes
168. bers from a display telephone without entering the programming mode If allowed in the Extension COS you can also assign names to System Speed Dial SSD numbers Operation PSD Names To set PSD names using a large display or small display phone Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key 2 Press the PROG key 54 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Action Result 3 Press the key 4 Enter 0 for the PSD Name Assignment mode ABCDE F P80 displays where P80 PSD bin 80 5 Press the up or down arrow key to display the desired PSD A B C D E F PXX displays where bin number desired PSD bin number 6 Enter the extension name If using alarge display phone press the soft key next to the desired row of letters See Example 1 on page 52 If using a small display phone press the appropriate one touch key See Example 2 on page 53 Note Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data 7 Usethe bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter See Example 1 Large display phone on page 52 See Example 2 Small display phone on page 53 Notes Press the key to erase a single entry Press the key to enter a space 8 Repeat steps 6 7 as many times as necessary to enter the desired PSD name Note Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry 9 Press the HOLD key whe
169. call logs and the number of entries Table 12 1 Call log maximums Call Log Maximums Maximum Maximum number of extensions with Call Log 20 per cabinet entry Number of log entries that can be stored for an extension After the call log fills with 10 entries each additional entry overwrites the oldest log 10 The Call Log stores information for Caller ID calls that ring a phone If the phone does not ring for instance when Call Forward All Calls is active there is no entry in the Call Log for that call Each Call Log entry includes the following call information e Calling number Time and date e Whether the call was answered How the call was routed The most recent entries are stored first in the Call Log 136 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Call Log Operation on a Small Display Key Telephone Operation To view the Call Log Action Result 1 Go off hook or press On Off Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the Call Log feature code default CONF 96 Phone enters call log mode 3 Press the following keys to view the call log Move forward in call log Move back in call log 4 Exit the Call Log by going on hook or by pressing On Off Example Caller ID Call Log Small Display Telephone Call Result blank Answered Calling Party NO01 20155536
170. ch Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Call Park Hold access code default 771 3 Ifnecessary page the party that needs to retrieve the call To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Call Park Answer Other Ext access code default 773 3 Dial the number of the extension that parked the call Connected to parked call To park a call at another extension Action Result While on a call press the hookswitch Intercom dial tone Enter the Call Park Transfer access code default 774 Dial the extension number to receive the parked call Tope If necessary page the party that needs to retrieve the call 262 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features To retrieve a transfered call park Action Result 1 At the extension with the transfered park call lift the hand Intercom dial tone set 2 Enter Call Park Answer Self access code default 772 Connected to parked call Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI System Extension Park Hold Recall Timer Considerations e You cannot park more than one call at a time e calls are on hold and the last call is parked the other call is then considered the last held call If a transfer
171. cking Architecture 57 Non verified Account Codes Key Telephone 113 Key Telephone 176 Meet Me Answer DSLT 236 Key Telephone 176 SLT 280 Network 57 SLT 280 PBX Compatability 28 PC Based Customizing Tool 59 Personal Speed Dialing PSD SLT 251 DSLT 238 Non Verified ID Account Codes Key Telephone 179 DSLT 204 SLT 282 Numbering Plan Pickup Flexible 45 DSLT 219 Extension Direct Pickup O DSLT 220 Key Telephone 131 SLT 264 Offhook Extension Group Pickup Monitor All Calls T R 170 DSLT 219 DSLT 234 Key Telephone 129 Key Telephone 170 276 SLT 263 Voice Announce DSLT 219 DSLT 235 External Calls Key Telephone 171 DSLT 219 SLT 278 Key Telephone 129 Offhook Monitor SLT 263 Key Telephone 170 Key Telephone 129 Offhook Signaling SLT 263 DSLT 234 Specific Group Key Telephone 170 276 DSLT 219 Offhook Voice Announce DSLT 235 Key Telephone 129 Key Telephone 171 SLT 263 SLT 278 Key Telephone 129 One Touch Keys 173 SLT 263 Onhook Dialing Trunk Direct Pickup DSLT 234 DSLT 221 Key Telephone 175 Key Telephone 132 Outgoing Dialed Digit Maximum 292 SLT 266 Override Trunk Group Pickup SSD TRS 63 DSLT 221 Key Telephone 131 P SLT 265 Pilot Distributed Hunt Group 47 Pilot Terminal Hunt Group 46 Pad Port Digital 40 Virtual 67 Pad Class 40 Power Failure Transfer 58 Paging Power On Maintenance 58 DSLT 236 Priority Message Wait Callback 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 331 Index Section 700 Operation Message Key 1
172. cription Virtual ports are not physical ports in the System They are phantom or simulated ports used in the System to support Virtual extension ringing e Virtual floating hold Up to 96 virtual ports may be assigned per cabinet Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension You can assign an actual extension number to a virtual port You can then assign the extension number as any actual extension incoming call settings and types Station Class of Service COS tenant group pickup group etc You can also assign the virtual port to an FF key on one or more telephones and set to ring Any call directed to the virtual port extension number will ring the assigned telephone s Virtual extensions provide a mechanism for ringing multiple phones simultaneously For instance a Direct Inward Dialing DID entry can only be set to ring to one extension number However if the DID is set to ring a virtual extension and the virtual extension is assigned to ring keys on multiple extensions the DID will ring the multiple extensions Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Virtual Port used for Floating Hold You can assign a virtual port that is not assigned an extension number to be used for floating hold The virtual port is assigned to an FF key Calls can then be placed on hold on the virtual port FF key Any extension that is assigned the same virtual port FF key can then pick up the held call
173. ction 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number Dialed extension number displays Busy tone 3 Enter the Callback Request code default 3 Ringback tone 4 Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone System calls back when called extension becomes free To respond to a callback request Action 1 Lift the handset System automatically redials extension Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Callback Request Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Callback Request Receive Extension COS Considerations N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 119 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Call Forwarding CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension to an outside line or to Voice Mail Call Forwarding can be set or canceled under the following conditions from either your own extension or from an alternate extension e Call Forwarding Calls e Call Forwarding Busy e Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding All Calls When Call Forwarding All Calls is set all incoming calls to an extension are immediately forwarded Operation To set Call Forwarding All Calls Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter
174. ction 700 Operation To retrieve a call from Floating Hold Action Result 1 A Press the FF key assigned to the Floating Hold orbit CO displays if line released where number where the call is held XXX outside line number OR A Enter the Floating Hold Answer feature access code default 9 B Enter the Floating Hold orbit number 001 576 for the held call Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 01 Floating Hold on HOLD Key e FFI 2 Dial Plan e FF4 FF Key Feature Assignment Considerations N A Exclusive Hold With Exclusive Hold only the extension that held the call can retrieve it Exclusive Hold can be used to hold CO calls and extension calls Operation To place a call on Exclusive Hold Action Result 1 While on a call press the CO key used for the call or press Intercom dial tone the HOLD key Hold CO XXX displays where XXX outside line number To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold Action Result 1 Press the CO key on which the call is held CO LED stops flashing remains green CO XXX displays if call released where XXX outside line number Hardware Requirements e N A 126 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Related Programming e FF1 0 01 Exclusive Hold CO Key e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Hold Ke
175. ction 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Ifnecessary access an outside line Outside dial tone 3 Press the AUTO key OR Enter the Speed Dial Originate code default 80 4 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 5 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To delete a PSD number Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 Press the HOLD key Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Cu pus Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming FF8 1 PSD Numbers e FF8 1 PSD Names Considerations e Storing a new number erases any previously stored data e Speed Dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters The following table reflects which keys to use To indicate Enter Press Digit or character 0 1 9 4 Intercom Level AUTO st MCO Code AUTO 0 Pause REDIAL DP DTMF Code AUTO SSD Code AUTO NN N Hyphen PROG 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 239 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation ndicates that the digits that follow are either a feature access code or an exten
176. dant The DID number may have from 1 to 4 digits typically 4 Each DID Trunk Interface card VB 44520 supports up to 8 DID trunks Hardware Requirements 48V power supply is required Related Programming e N A 34 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Considerations e The DID Trunk card supports 1 to 4 digit dial pulse 10 pps or Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMP signaling DID numbers must be between 0 and 9999 CO Trunk Interface Ground Start Ground start trunks are supported in the System with the VB 44511 Loop Start Ground Start trunk interface Each card supplies 8 circuits that can be individually configured for either loop start or ground start operation Ground start trunks are useful in preventing call collision Hardware Requirements e When ground start trunks are used the 48V power supply is required Related Programming e N A Considerations N A CO Trunk Interface ISDN BRI The System supports ISDN BRI with the VB 44530 ISDN BRI interface unit The VB 44530 is a T Point ISDN BRI that supports 2 B bearer channels and 1 D data channel 2B D 192kbps This unit connects to an ISDN Data Service Unit DSU Point to point and point to multi operations are selectable The ISDN BRI supports enblock setting and enblock setting at the sub address Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Consideration
177. day of week When setting the time you can specify 12 or 24 hour format Operation To change the system date time and day of week Action Result 1 Ifnot already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on page 75 81 User MAINT displays 2 At the 81 level enter 000 3 Press the HOLD key 0 YYMMDD Date displays 4 Enter the year two characters month two characters and day two characters Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key 5 Press the HOLD key 1 HHMM Time displays 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 75 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Action Result 6 Enter the hour two characters and minute two characters Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key 7 Press the HOLD key 2 Day of the Week displays 8 Enter the day of week where 1 Mon 2 Tues 3 Wed 4 Thurs 5 Fri 6 Sat 0 Sun Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key 9 Press the HOLD key to store the entry 10 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 OR User MAINT displays To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF OR key ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A Set Personal Speed Dia
178. de the soft key simply press the associated soft key Operation To enable Variable Mode Action Result 1 Press the ON OFF key 2 Press the Variable Mode FF key AUTO FNC Mode displays 3 Press the ON OFF key Programmed features display To Execute a Variable Mode Function Action Result 1 Press the NEXT or PREV keys on the large display tele phone or the up or down arrow keys on the small display telephones until the desired function appears 2 Press the soft key next to the desired function The variable mode function executes To cancel Variable Mode Action Result 1 Press the ON OFF key 2 Press the Variable Mode FF key AUTO FNC Mode displays 3 Press the ON OFF key again 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 195 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation To assign Variable Mode Functions to a Small Display Telephone Action Result 1 Press the ON OFF key 2 Press PROG 95 XX Fixed Feature Code see Table The variable mode function executes 13 on page 154 or press PROG 95 XX REDIAL Flexible Feature Code see Table 13 on page 154 where XX is the Flexible Screen position as listed below 3 Press the ON OFF key To assign Variable Mode Functions to a Large Display Telephone Action Result 1 Press the ON OFF key 2 Using the FUNCTION EXT menu display
179. dy in User Maintenance mode enter User Main 81 tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on User MAINT displays page 75 2 At the 81 level enter 09 3 Press the HOLD key 8109 TRF of CFWD displays 4 Enter 0 5 Press the HOLD key CFWD Busy EXT displays 6 Dial the extension number 104 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance Action Result 7 Press the HOLD key Enter CODE displays 8 Enter the destination extension 9 Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next extension number displays 10 To set Call Forward Busy destinations for additional exten sions press the volume up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired Extension 11 Repeat steps 9 11 until all extension are entered 12 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode 13 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 OR User MAINT displays To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF OR key ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations e N A et Call Forwar o Answer Destination Extension Description You can assign a Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension for each extension This is typically used for forwarding calls to voice mail Operation To set a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension using either a large d
180. e 0 5 21 23 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 25 27 29 92 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A Set Special Day Mode Description For a description of Automatic Day Night System Mode see Automatic Day Night Mode on page 39 You can specify up to 20 special days for the System For each special day you can specify up to 5 modes settings Operation To set the Special Day Modes Action Result If not already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on page 75 81 User MAINT displays At the 81 level enter 07 Press the HOLD key 8107 System Mode displays acters for the Special Day 1 Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key 4 Enter 1 5 Press the HOLD key 1 Mode Special Day displays 6 Press the HOLD key 1000 MMDD Special Day 01 displays 7 Enter the date by month two characters and day two char Press the HOLD key 1001 HHMM S Day 01 1 Start displays Enter the start time in hours two characters and minutes two characters for mode 1 Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA
181. e 70 Voice Mail Transfer Key 71 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 21 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation AEC Disconnect Description This feature allows the System to send a disconnect signal of 1 second to an analog device indicating that the calling party has hung up terminated the call This feature is useful with a Third party Voice Mail or an Answering Machine By default this feature is disabled Hardware Requirements e AEC port Related Programming e FF3 0 Loop Disconnect Signal Considerations 1 second time duration of the disconnect signal is fixed It cannot be changed Attendant Groups CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description An attendant phone is often used as a central answering point for other extensions In addition attendant phones frequently have special capabilities for monitoring and programming extensions You can reach the assigned attendant group by dialing the feature access code for Attendant Calls usually 0 If an attendant phone is available but does not answer within a set time the call will move to the next available attendant phone If all members of the attendant group are busy for a specified time the call can be forwarded to other extensions or another hunt group The system allows up to 20 extensions to be included in an attendant group Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF5 0 01 Attendant Hunt Pilo
182. e CO Pooled Trunk Access Music On Hold Primary Rate Interface Personal Speed Dial Single Line Telephone System Speed Dial Toll Restriction Service Least Cost Routing DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Chapter 2 List of Features This chapter contains the following tables which list the features available with the System Table Page System Features 14 Maintenance Features 15 Extension Features 16 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 Chapter 2 List of Features Section 700 Operation Table 1 System Features Topic Page AEC Disconnect 22 Attendant Groups 22 Attendant Groups 22 Automatic Call Distributor 23 Automatic Route Selection 24 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer 25 Background Music MOH Separation 25 Battery Backup 25 Building Block Expansion Capability 26 Built In Voice Processing Unit 26 Call Progress Tones 27 Caller ID 28 Centrex PBX Compatibility 28 Class of Service 29 CO Ringing Types 32 CO Trunk Interface 34 Computer Telephony Integration Capability 36 Data Security 37 Day Night System Mode 37 Digital Pad 40 Direct Inward System Access 40 Distinctive Ringing 41 Door Box 42 Extension Interface 43 Flexible Numbering Plan 45 Free Slot 46 Hunting Groups 46 Internal Hold Tone 48 MCO Tenant Group 48 Memory Backup 49 Music on Hold 50 Name
183. e Mail system The System can automatically change DP to DTMF tones based on the incoming and outgoing timers Operation To switch from DP to DTMF dialing Action Result 1 Press the key or the key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI DTMF e FF2 DP to DTMF Outgoing FF2 DP to DTMF Incoming Considerations N A DSS 72 Console CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description The DSS 72 console is a 72 key console that can be attached to a key telephone The 72 keys on the DSS 72 can be programmed as Direct Station Select DSS keys for internal lines In addition to providing direct station selection the DSS keys also provide Busy Lamp Fields BLFs that allow you to monitor the status of other extensions The LED lights red when the assigned extension is busy and lights green when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb DND are activated For additional information see Flexible Function Keys on page 152 Hardware Requirements e VB 44320 Related Programming 150 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features FF4 FF Key Assignment Considerations e Pressing a DSS key while connected to an outside line places the line on hold maximum of 12 DSS 72 consoles can be connected to 96 port system EM 24 Console CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 AII Versions Description The 24 is
184. e N A Considerations N A Class of Service Description A Class of Service COS allows or restricts access to a group of features or functions For instance an Extension COS may allow Call Forwarding features In the System both extensions and trunks use classes of service The System supports the following COSs for trunks and extensions COS Trunk Tie COS Ext Ext Restriction COS Extension Feature COS Trunk to Trunk Restriction Class of Service Trunk Tie Tie Trunk COS allows or restricts access to various features Each trunk is assigned to one of 16 trunk classes of service 00 15 The following table shows the features that can be enabled disabled for each trunk COS Table 4 Trunk COS Number Feature 1 Intercom Ringing Tone CO or intercom ring tone 2 Dial Tone to Tie Lines Enable Disable 3 Forced Recover on Fast Busy Tone Send fast busy or disconnect line 4 DID DDI Dialed Number Conversion Table DID DNIS Table A or B 5 Paging on DISA Tie Line Call Allow Restrict 6 DISA ID Verification Hardware Requirements N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 29 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Class of Service Ext Ext Restriction Ext Ext Restriction COS allows or restricts calls placed to other extensions based upon the Extension COS Each Extension COS is programmed to eith
185. e Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 3 MCO Access e FFI 2 Dial Plan e FF5 2 MCO Trunk Group Outbound e FF7 ARS TRS Considerations System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six cabinet configuration These lines can be divided into 99 different trunk groups e Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes System defaults for trunk access codes are displayed in the following table e MCOI can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature e MCOI access code is used for Automatic Route Selection ARS access code Table 14 MCO Trunk Access Codes MCO Group Trunk Access Code MCOI 9 MCO2 81 MCO3 82 MCO4 83 MCOS5 84 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 193 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Trunk Queuing CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description When you try to originate a call by MCO enter 9 and all outside lines in a trunk group are busy the System can call you when a line becomes free Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings Operation To set Trunk Queuing Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Press the CO line key or enter a trunk access code Busy tone 3 Enter the Call
186. e YYY the next account code table number 12 To add additional Verified Account numbers press the vol ume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired Verified Account table number Desired Verified Account table number displays 13 Repeat steps 8 12 until all Verified Account numbers are entered 14 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode Table Number 15 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key OR To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF key 81 User MAINT displays OR ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A 88 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance et Call Forwar odes for Voice Description For a description of Call Forward ID codes for Voice Mail see Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail on page 68 Voice Mail Call Forward ID codes are used by voice mail systems to identify the correct mail box for storing messages The actual entry needed will vary by voice mail systems and configuration Often the entry is the extension number Operation To set the Call Forward ID code Action Result 1 If not already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on page 75 81 User MAINT displays 2 Atthe 81 level ente
187. e determined and the system jumps there Three route types are available These include the Routing Table a direct trunk group selection the Route List Table a route priority consideration and the Time List Table selects a route list based on date day of the week and time of day The simplest call routing method is the Route Table This determines a trunk group to use and if programmed a digits modification pattern to use Up to 24 prefix digits may be deleted up to 10 prefix digits can be added and up to 10 suffix digits may be added If multiple trunk groups are to be considered for the call the Route List Table is used This table consists of up to 5 possible routes and an associated ARS level required If the ARS level for the first priority route is equal to or less than the ARS level associated with the call originator then the listed route will be tried If the first listed Route Table trunk group has no available trunks busy then the next priority route is considered If Queuing Point is set to continue then the first priority trunks are retried first before trying to a next priority route If the Warning Tone is enabled then before a call is connected to a found trunk a warning tone is sounded to allow the caller to hang up before the more expensive trunks are used If time of day day of week and day of the year need be considered in routing the call then the Time List Table should be referenced first The Time List Table allo
188. e forward in call log Move back in call log NEXT View the next 5 calls PREV View the previous 5 calls To return a call and exit the Call Log Press the Soft key to the left of the desired number to access Access MCO 1 dial 9 dial add digits usu ally 1 and dial the displayed caller ID Or Press the Soft key to the right of the desired number to access 1 dial 9 and dial the caller ID To store the Call Log number in a personal speed dial Action Result Go off hook or press On Off Intercom dial tone Dial the Call Log feature code default CONF 96 Phone enters call log mode Press the following keys to view the call log Move forward in call log Move back in call log NEXT View the next 5 calls PREV View the previous 5 calls To store the call log number in a personal speed dial Press PROG the speed dial bin number 80 99 and press the left Soft key to dial the add digits usually an area code and HOLD Or Press PROG the speed dial bin number 80 99 and press the right Soft key and press HOLD Hardware Hequirements Caller ID daughter circuit card on the Loop Start Trunk Card if a Loop Start Trunk receives the call ISDN PRI T Point if ISDN card receives the call Large Display Telephone or 44 Series Small Display Telephone 140 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700
189. e normal daytime attendant group The System provides one Night mode for night call handling However there are three night feature access codes Night Night 1 and Night 2 These three codes may be used to provide different two way Voice Processing Unit messages i e Night may select one message Night 1 may select a different message and Night 2 may select a third message Typically the Day mode is used for normal call processing of outside calls TRS calls and attendant calls The second day mode Day 2 may be used for alternative call handling such as during a lunch break etc There are two ways to change day night service modes e Manually e Automatically The following table lists the impact on TRS Ringing Attendant and Built in Voice Processing Unit in the various system modes 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 37 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Table 6 System Mode Impact on TRS Ringing Attendant and Built in Voice Processing Unit BUILT IN SYSTEM VOICE MODE TRS RING ATTENDANT PROCESSING UNIT Day 1 Day TRS Mode Day 1 Ring Pattern Day 1 Attend Group Day 1 Message Day 2 Day TRS Mode Day 2 Ring Pattern Day 2 Attend Group Day 2 Message Same for Day 1 and Handling Day 2 Night Night TRS Mode Night Ring Pattern Night Attend Group Night Message Same for Night 1 Same for Night 1 Same for Night 1 and 2 and 2 and 2 Night 1 Night TRS Mode
190. e the same number of digits as the first extension Speed Dialing CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The System supports the following speed dial features e Personal Speed Dial PSD e System Speed Dial SSD e Speed Dial Linking e Speed Dial Name Assignment 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 281 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Personal Speed Dial You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored in PSD bins numbered 80 99 Operation To assign PSD numbers Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 Dial the number Press the key Sui SES zoe s Replace the handset To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone If necessary access an outside line Outside dial tone Enter the Speed Dial Originate code default 80 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 en SS ogg por Complete the call and replace the handset To delete a PSD number Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 Press the key cn Hos aro a e Complete the call and replace
191. ear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 91 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Action Result 9 Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next pattern mode displays 10 To set additional mode schedules press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired mode Desired pattern mode displays 11 Repeat steps 6 10 until all patterns and modes are set There are 3 total patterns with 5 start time modes each Note Entry Positions are listed in Table 9 on page 92 12 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode 0 Mode Schedule displays 13 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 OR User MAINT displays To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF OR key ON OFF LED goes off Table 9 Mode Schedule Patterns addresses amp values 8107 0 00 29 Hold MMDD or HHMM or 0 5 Hold VALUES MMDD or 0 5 ist MODE 2nd MODE Start Time 00 02 Pattern 1 HHMM ADDRESS NOs 00 29 MODES 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE 04 06 08 Mode 0 5 01 03 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Start Time 10 12 Pattern 2 HHMM 05 07 09 14 16 18 Mode 0 5 11 13 0 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Start Time 20 22 Pattern 3 HHMM 24 26 28 Mod
192. eatures Section 700 Operation Action Result 3 Enter the OHVA feature access code default 8 OHVA EXT XXX displays if busy extension called where XXX calling extension EXT LED flashes 4 Make your announcement To answer an OHVA Action Result 1 Press the OHVA Split key Split key flashes red Note You must program an FF key as a split key default 71 to use this feature 2 return to the previous call press the Split key again The OHVA originating party receives Busy signal To transfer a call using OHVA Action Result 1 Press the HOLD key to put the current call on hold Current call on hold 2 Dialthe extension number to which the call is being trans Busy signal ferred 3 Enter OHVA feature access code default 2 8 and announce the call to be transferred 4 If transfer is Not accepted retrieve the call by pressing the associ ated flashing MCO key if an appearing call or by pressing the HOLD key if a non appearing call Accepted and On hook Transfer is enabled for your extension replace the handset or press the ON OFF key If On hook Transfer is not enabled for your extension press the PROG key or RELEASE key if using DSS 72 172 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To answer a call after it has been announced using the OHV
193. eceive Extension Extension COS Assignments FF4 FF Key Assignment Considerations If On hook Transfer is enabled the held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the OHVA hangs up e You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA e If you make an OHVA to an SLT the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement Message Waiting Callback CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer you can leave a message wait indication at that extension requesting a return call 278 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features Operation To leave a message waiting indication Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number Ring or busy tone 3 While the telephone is still ringing or when you hear the busy tone enter the Message Wait Set code default 4 4 Replace the handset To answer a message waiting indication Callback Action Result 1 Lift the handset Stutter dial tone 2 Enter the Message Wait Callback code default 6 Telephone automatically dials extension that set Message Waiting Indication To cancel a Callback Message Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Callback Request Cancel code default 5
194. ect Line DL Appearances e MCOLine Appearance DSS BLF Appearances When a DSS BLF key is programmed it automatically provides one touch dialing and DSS and BLF for the assigned extension numbers If desired the DSS BLF key can also provide ring or delayed ring monitor For example you can set extension A as a DSS BLF ringing key on extension B When extension A rings the LED of the DSS BLF key on extension B flashes and the phone rings Ringing or delayed ringing can be set on extensions which have a BLF key The LED of the DSS BLF key flashes green during ringing and the display shows the BLF extension number When extension A is in use the LED of the DSS BLF key on extension B lights red If one extension has the Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb DND feature activated the DSS BLF key lights green 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 163 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Four DSS BLF modes are available as follows FF Key BLF LED Extension Call Ring Ring Voice Mail DSS BLF Type Entry Indication Call Pickup Immed Delayed Transfer DSS Only No 9 Ext Yes Yes No No No Yes Pick Up No Ring DSS BLF 81 Ext Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Immediate Ring DSS BLF 82 Ext Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Delayed Ring DSS BLF No Ring 83 Ext Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Ope
195. ed for external paging Related Programming e FF1 0 02 Paging Override e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Paging e FF1 0 04 Trunk COS Paging e FFI 2 Dial Plan e FF2 Trunk COS FF3 Extension COS Considerations e If an external paging system has been connected pages can be made to Paging groups 0 9 through the external speakers Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0 9 e Anextension can belong to more than one paging group 280 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features e Only one page may be performed at a time If you attempt to make a page while another extension is paging you will receive a busy signal unless your system allows Paging Override Reset Call CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description If you dial a busy extension the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply pressing the last digit of the new extension number Operation To use Reset Call to dial another extension after a busy extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Dial an extension Busy tone 3 Enter the last digit of the next extension Example You dial extension 213 but it is busy To dial extension 214 enter 4 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan Considerations second extension called using the Reset Call feature must hav
196. ee To enter User Maintenance mode on 81 User MAINT displays 2 Atthe 81 level enter 08 o Press the HOLD key 8108 Walking TRS Cod displays 4 Press the HOLD key Walking ID Ext displays 5 Dial the extension number 6 Press the HOLD key Walking ID XXX displays 7 Enter the 4 digit Walking TRS Code 8 Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next extension number displays 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 103 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Action Result 9 To set additional extension WalkingTRS Codes press the volume up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired Extension 10 Repeat steps 8 10 until all extension are entered 11 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode 12 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 OR User MAINT displays To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF OR key ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension Description You can assign a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension for each extension This is typically used for forwarding calls to voice mail Operation To set a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension using either a large display or small display phone Action Result 1 Ifnot alrea
197. ee Sas Wie ae eRe eee 34 CO Trunk Interface i sissies eee bed ee ie RR edie ce Peek 34 CO Trunk Interface DID llli 34 CO Trunk Interface Ground Start 35 CO Trunk Interface ISDN BRI 0 00 cee es 35 CO Trunk Interface ISDN PRI llsleeeeel es 35 CO Trunk Interface s Loop Start as suiza ape fede ES RESO EAS ONSE TS 36 Computer Telephony Integration 36 Data Security xs siia we pani x rr ea a fred Eat aq idolo der 37 Day Night System Mode isses ius enhn ERR RE rds ear an 37 Manual Day Night Mode elu A If See hee RR IIR 38 Automatic Day Night Mode 0 0 nee 39 Digital nx ya e c ood cia CT n 40 Direct Inward System 5 40 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 3 Contents Section 700 Operation Distinctive RINGING ke Ek E12 08088 ees band Deemed wales 41 Door BOX ica cunas ewe ee Nee ER a a 42 Door Box Sensor uses bees boy Sede S Ea ede Ee d ea E ER e Wed 43 Extension Interfaces 4 4 tia Khaini PAR wa HE EXER 43 Digital Key Telephones 2 usta iom stata da wae tees TOES 43 Analog Device Capability esset RR be reverts Rone be 44 DP DTMF Single Line Telephones 75 44 ISDN BRI S Point Interface
198. een while the call is held To place a call on System Trunk Hold Press the HOLD key The key flashes green while the call is held To transfer a call Press HOLD dial the destination extension then press PROG if on hook transfer is off or go on hook Related Programming FF1 0 02 ARS for MCO Access Code 1 Route Advance for MCO Access Code FF1 3 MCO Group 5 2 MCO Outgoing Trunk Assignments FF5 3 MCO Incoming Trunk Assignments FF4 FF Key Assignments Considerations Press the MCO key that flashes red to answer an outside call If you are already on a call appearing on an MCO key and you press another MCO key a line on the other MCO key is selected and the first call is dropped If a CO key is assigned the CO Key LED will light when that specific trunk is used instead of the MCO key LED There are five groups of outside lines 9 and 81 84 default MCO keys cannot be assigned on the DSS 72 or the EM 24 An MCO key must be assigned in programming mode The MCO key cannot be assigned by the end user with FF key assignments Message Key CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 All Versions Description The System supports the MSG key on the VB 44225 large display phone This key provides the following functionality 166 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Message Wait Callback If a callback message has been left by another extension you can pre
199. efore the Recall Duration Timer expires the call will revert to the Attendant group If the called party does not exist the call recalls to the transferring extension You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do Not Disturb DND activated You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to For example if extension 221 is forwarded to extension 225 calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to extension 225 Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer If a call is unsupervised transferred to a busy extension the call will camp on to the busy extension To transfer to a outside party it is best to use supervised transfer If the trunk to trunk on hook transfer restriction is enabled a blind transfer will result in the loss of the second call but the 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 135 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation second call will be kept on hold If not enabled and the second outside party is busy the transferred party will receive busy aller all Log Description The Call Log keeps a record of Caller ID calls to individual phones The Call Log allows you to view Caller ID calls that have been sent to your phone and if desired return a call The following table shows maximum number of extensions that may have
200. efore two time list tables are completed When a call is made the system will check to see if this is a special day listed in a Time List Table If so it will use that table If not then it will check the day of week and use the associated table On weekdays we know that Carrier B is less expensive from midnight 0000 to 7 59am and from 6pm 1800 to midnight Carrier A is less expensive from 8am 0800 to 1759 We then reference a route list pattern for each call entry Table A 14 Example Time List Table 1 Time List Table 1 Day Of Week 5 Mon X Tue X Wed X Thu X Fri X Sat Special Days Time List Time Period 1 Time Period 2 Time Period 3 Time Period 4 Time Period 5 Pattern Number Start Route Start Route Start Route Start Route Start Route 1 500 Time List Time List Time List Time List Time List 1 0000 1 0800 2 1800 1 2 0000 3 0800 4 1800 3 3 0000 5 0800 6 1800 5 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 321 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation On weekends the time of day is not a cost factor Therefore there is only one time period used Table A 15 Example Time List Table 2 Time List Table 2 Day Of Week Sun X Wed Thu__ Fri__ Sat X Special Days 0101 0704 1127 1225 Time List Time Period 1 Time Period 2 Time Period 3 Time Period 4 Time Period 5 Pattern Num
201. elephone 134 SLT 267 TRS 59 TRS Class ARS Routing 293 TRS Class Features 292 293 TRS Codes Walking 103 TRS Configuration and Operation 295 TRS Features 292 TRS Level 293 TRS Operation 291 TRS Override SSD 63 l MCO 48 l TRS Override on SSD Dialing 292 Third Party Voice Mail 68 TRS Programming Operation Overview 296 Three Party Conference Calls Trunk Access DSLT 226 CO Line Key Trunk Access 191 Key Telephone 143 Direct Trunk Access l SLT 270 DSLT 244 Time i Key Telephone 191 Setting 75 SLT 286 Time List Table 295 DSLT 243 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 333 Index Section 700 Operation Key Telephone 190 MCO DSLT 244 Key Telephone 192 SLT 286 MCO Line Preference 192 SLT 286 Trunk Access Groups 66 Trunk Direct Pickup DSLT 221 Key Telephone 132 SLT 266 Trunk Group Pickup DSLT 221 Key Telephone 131 SLT 265 Trunk Interface 34 DID 34 Loop Start 36 Trunk Interface ISDN PRI 35 Trunk Queuing DSLT 245 Key Telephone 194 SLT 288 Trunk to Trunk Restriction COS 32 Trunk To Trunk Transfer Automatic 25 Trunk Tie COS 29 U Unsupervised Call Transfer DSLT 223 Key Telephone 134 SLT 267 User Maintenance 73 User Programming 74 V Variable Mode 195 Verified ID Account Codes DSLT 205 Key Telephone 114 SLT 252 Verified ID Codes Setting 87 Virtual Extension 67 Virtual Port 67 Floating Hold 67 Virtual Extension 67 Voice Calling Intercom Calling DSLT 231 Key Telephone 161 SLT
202. elephone Features Section 700 Operation Example 2 Small display phone Refer to the following diagram to determine which one touch key to press See step 7 8 above abcdef C ghijkl D mnopar Cstuvwx Cyz amp sp ABCDEF GHIJKL MNOPQR GTUVWX C Yz To enter D a Press the first one touch key from the left on the bottom row b Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row BIGITAL MODE COFA B C D E MO et eJ esee e C J C DJ DJ C 2 o A F a MER SEX Mee lu a ja ja j To enter 0 a Press the third one touch key from the left on the top row 188 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features b Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row BIGITAL MODE END O gt m no p qr O PROG e ms ese n EC jJ A F e L MIR 8 X v C J C J lt J C QJ CONF la ja Jiu jm j Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS User Log in e Extension COS e FF8 1 SSD amp PSD Considerations e The ability to assign SSD names is allowed restricted
203. em can automatically change DP to DTMF tones based on the incoming and outgoing timers Operation To switch from DP to DTMF dialing Action Result 1 Press the key or the key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI DTMF e FF2 DP to DTMF Outgoing e 2 DP to DTMF Incoming Considerations N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 229 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Flash CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description You can send a flash signal on your telephone to release an outside line and then either automatically reseize the same outside line or switch to extension dial tone status by pressing the FLASH key Trunk programming determines whether your phone reseizes the outside line or switches to extension dial tone status Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI1 1 Flash Timer e 2 Flash Pattern e FF2 Flash Key Operation Flash on PROG Recall Considerations N A Hot Line CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre assigned extension or speed dial number simply by lifting the handset You do not have to dial any digits Operation To immediately connect to a pre assigned extension or speed dial number Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Automatically connected
204. en backup batteries are installed the System will continue to operate in the event of a power failure If using Battery Backup backup batteries must be installed in each cabinet A fully loaded system will operate at least 30 minutes on backup batteries 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 25 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Hardware Requirements e Back up battery unit VB 44025 Related Programming e N A Considerations e device connected to the System but that does not derive its power from the System must have a backup power source to operate These devices include any System Message Detail Recording SMDR printer or recorder fax machine answering machine modem cordless telephone etc Building Block Expansion Capability Description The System is designed to support easy expansion Each cabinet in the System supports 96 ports 12 flexible slots as well as 2 option slots Up to 6 cabinets may be installed in the System for a total of 576 ports Up to 2 expansion cabinets may be connected to a base cabinet When a fourth cabinet is required another base cabinet is installed Up to 2 expansion cabinets may be connected to the second base cabinet This building block approach allows you to easily add equipment when needed without a major interruption in service or a major delay Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming N A Considerations e In addition to the add
205. end a Call Waiting signal to the busy extension 224 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Operation To set Automatic Camp on Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number Called party hears alert tone Calling party hears ringback tone 3 Remain on the line until the called party answers To set Manual Camp on Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Dial the extension number Busy tone Enter the Camp on Call Waiting code default 2 Called party hears alert tone Calling party hears ringback tone Remain on the line until the called party answers To answer a Camp on Call Waiting signal Action Result Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key again to be con nected to the waiting call OR Press the HOLD key Current call placed on hold Connected to waiting call Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF1 0 03 Extension COS Manual Camp on Send FF1 0 03 Extension COS Manual Camp on Receive FF1 2 Dial Plan FF3 Extension COS FF3 0 Auto Camp on Considerations You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp on See Camping a Call Ont
206. endant Group 1176 1177 No Restriction Local calls only 1 4 No special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc Allowed to call Birmingham Retail floor 1178 1253 Local calls only Local calls only 4 4 No special numbers 976 No special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc collect calls etc Allowed to call Birmingham Allowed to call Birmingham Warehouse 1254 1260 Extension calling and Extension calling and 5 5 emergency calling only emergency calling only a After all user data has been entered then assign class numbers 314 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Table A 8 Example MCO Tenant Trunk Groups Worksheet Tenant Name _ XYZ Department Stores Tenant Number 1 Trunk Group Description Trunks in Trunk Group Usage Notes Number 0 99 Two Way CO GS Tie Number BSSC Line FX etc 1 Local CO Access 1 24 Local access to long distance carriers A least cost Day carrier and B least cost night and weekend carrier via equal access numbers 2 Foreign Exchange lines to 25 26 Foreign Exchange lines for calls to Birmingham Birmingham area code 205 and exchanges 555 556 and 557 3 Out WATS 27 28 Out WATS service to the complete US Less expensive than carriers A and B 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 315 Appendix A
207. endant Group Calls 115 Auto Repeat Dial 116 Background Music 116 Busy Override 117 Callback Request 119 Call Forwarding 120 Call Hold 124 Call Hold 127 Call Pickup 129 Call Transfer 132 Caller ID Call Log 136 Camp on Call Waiting 141 Conference Calls 143 Display Information 145 Do Not Disturb 148 DP to DTMF Signal Conversion 150 DSS 72 Console 150 EM 24 Console 151 Flash 151 Flexible Function Keys 152 Handsfree Answerback 157 Handsfree Operation 158 Headset Operation 159 Hot Dial Pad 160 Hot Line 160 Intercom Calling 161 Last Number Redial 162 Line Appearances 163 Message Key 166 Message Waiting Callback 167 Mute Function 169 Offhook Monitor 170 Offhook Signaling 170 Offhook Voice Announce 171 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 2 List of Features Topic Page One Touch Keys 173 Onhook Dialing 175 Paging 176 Reset Call 177 Ringing Line Preference 178 Speed Dialing 179 Timed Reminder Call 189 Trunk Access 190 Trunk Queuing 194 Variable Mode 195 Voice Recognition 197 Volume Control 197 198 Walking TRS Class of Service 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 Chapter 2 List of Features Section 700 Operation 18 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Chapter 3 System Features System Features are either available on a system wide basis or aid in the overall administration of
208. ent 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 61 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Considerations e ISDN phones may not set BLF ringing e For more information on BLF ringing see Line Appearances on page 163 Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing Extensions that have Direct Station Select DSS BLF FF keys assigned may be set to delay ring on those keys Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF4 FF Key Assignments Considerations e ISDN phones may not set BLF ringing e For more information on BLF ringing see Line Appearances on page 163 Slide Ringing CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Similar to Delayed Ringing Slide Ringing allows an alternate position to answer calls If a call is not answered within a slide ringing time period the call can be set to ring at another phone with that trunk key One possible use for Slide Ringing is in an office with a common secretary A non ringing FF key can be assigned for each CO trunk used by the group If a call is not answered within the slide ringing timer the call will ring the common secretary Hardware Hequirements e N A Related Programming e FFI11 02 Slide Alarm Ringing Timer e FF2 Trunk setting Slide Ringing FF4 FF Key Assignment Direct Line Key Considerations N A Alarm Ringing Alarm Ringing allows the incoming ringing tone to be changed if the call is not answered in a predetermined time This c
209. ent billing code The entered Code will display on the phone s LCD as it s dialed so the user can tell it s being registered Then later the SMDR reports will show the Code dialed for each call and even sort the report by these Codes There are two different types of account codes you can use in the DBS 576 Non Verified Account Codes Non Verified Codes aren t checked by the system for validity the user can enter anything from 1 10 digits long Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced Account Codes the user must enter a code for every call or voluntary Account Codes the user can enter a code but doesn t have to for each call Non Verified Account Codes can be assigned to incoming and or outgoing calls For incoming calls the user can enter the Code anytime during the call For outgoing calls the user either enters the Code before accessing an outside line for forced Codes or anytime during the call for voluntary Codes Verified Account Codes Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a code that has been preprogrammed into an Account Code Table These codes can also be either forced or voluntary You can program these codes with their own Toll Restriction Service TRS Class assignment so that when entered they will override the extension s TRS Class Thus Verified Account Code users can float from phone to phone placing calls that would normally be restricted on that phone Non V
210. ently not used For instance a call from an extension assigned to extension pad class 1 to a trunk assigned to trunk pad class 3 would received the volume adjustment assigned to this connection combination Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Direct Inward System Access All Versions Description Direct Inward System Access DISA gives off site users dial in access to the System You access DISA from an outside location by entering a digit number assigned to a DISA trunk For security reasons sixteen incoming DISA ID codes TRS class can be assigned If a code is assigned it must be entered as soon as the DISA trunk answers 40 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Operation To make a DISA call to an extension Action Result 1 From an outside location enter the DISA trunk number DISA dial tone 2 Ifan incoming DISA code is assigned enter the DISA code up to 10 digits Otherwise proceed to step 3 3 Dial the extension number To make a DISA call to an outside number Action Result 1 From an outside location enter the DISA trunk number DISA dial tone 2 Ifan incoming DISA code is assigned enter the DISA code up to 10 digits Otherwise proceed to step 3 3 Enter the Trunk group number 9 or 81 84 4 Dial the phone number Hardware
211. equirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations e For more information on setting and retrieving message waiting see the telephone operation sections that follow in this document Message Key ID Code On a large display phone you can use a Message key labeled MSG to either retrieve Voice Mail messages or respond to telephone messages When responding to Voice Mail messages from a 3rd party Voice Mail system the Message key needs to have an ID code set to identify the caller to the Voice Mail system You can also use the Message key to program a Voice Mail password You must program the Message key using the User Maintenance feature Set Message Key ID Code on page 90 Operation To retrieve a message at Voice Mail Action Result 1 Press the MSG key Voice mail instructions 2 Follow the Voice Mail instructions for retrieving messages 3 When finished retrieving messages replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A 70 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Voice Mail Transfer Key Description The Voice Mail Transfer VM TRF key allows you to transfer calls to voice mailboxes without waiting for voice mail to answer You can assign a Voice Mail Transfer key from a phone or through system programing Two Voice Mail Transfer
212. er access code default 774 3 Dialthe extension number to receive the parked call 4 If necessary page the party that needs to retrieve the call To retrieve a transfered call park Action Result 1 Atthe extension with the transfered park call lift the hand Intercom dial tone set or press the ON OFF key 2 Enter Call Park Answer Self access code default 772 Connected to parked call Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI System Extension Park Hold Recall Timer Considerations e You cannot park more than one call at a time No more than one Call Park Answer key may be assigned to a single telephone e calls are on hold and the last call is parked the other call is then considered the last held call If a transfer is performed the remaining held call would be the call transferred not the parked call 218 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Call Pickup CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The System allows the following types of call pickup e Extension Group Pickup e Extension Direct Pickup e Trunk Group Pickup e Trunk Direct Pickup Extension Group Pickup Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call within your extension pickup group or in a different pickup group without having to dial the number of the ringing extension Three
213. er originate or not originate calls to another Extension COS Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Class of Service Extension e FF1 0 10 Ext Ext Restriction e FF2 Extension COS Assignment Considerations N A Class of Service Extension Feature Extension COS allows or restricts access to certain extension features The extension features are described later in this manual Each extension is assigned to one of 16 classes of service 00 15 The following table shows the features that can be enabled disabled for each Extension COS Table 5 Extension COS Class of Service Features Number Feature 1 Intercom Call Type Tone Voice Onhook Transfer at Ringback Allow Restrict Onhook Transfer at Talk Allow Restrict On Hook Transfer at Camp On Allow Restrict 3 4 5 Exclusive Hold for Non Appearing CO System Exclusive 6 Exclusive Hold on SLTs System Exclusive 7 8 9 Brokers Hold on SLTs 3 Party Conference Brokers Hookflash During Talk on SLTs Allow Restrict SSD Assignment Allow Restrict 10 SSD Assignment to MCO Tenant Groups Allow Restrict 11 SSD Dialing Allow Restrict 12 Intercom Redialing Allow Restrict 13 Direct Trunk Access Allow Restrict 30 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features
214. er the Account Code max 10 digits Press the key Enter a trunk access code ee E Dial the phone number Hardware Requirements e An SMDR printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code records Related Programming e FF1 0 19 TRS Class for Forced Account Code e FF1 2 Dial Plan Forced Account Verified Account e FF8 1 04 Verified Account Codes with TRS Class Considerations e Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built In Voice Mail e Even though up to 10 digits may be entered the system verifies the ID based on the first 4 digits only e Account codes will be cancelled after using CO queuing e Account codes are not available for a Dial Pulse SLT SLT telephones can only use account codes with outgoing calls only 252 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features e Account Codes interact with TRS as shown in the following table TRS Class Forced or Not Forced On yerme No Account Entry Account Entry Not Forced Non Verified Extension Port Based TRS Extension Port Based TRS Class Class Verified Account Code Based TRS Class Forced Non Verified TRS Class for Forced Extension Port Based TRS Account Code Class Verified FF1 0 19 0001 Account Code Based TRS Class e F
215. er the number of the call pickup group 01 72 where the call is ringing Extension number or outside phone num ber displays 4 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 02 Intercom Voice Call Pickup e FFI 2 Dial Plan e FF5 6 Call Pickup Group Assignment Considerations e Extension Group Pickup 12 cabinet maximum 72 group 6 cabinet configuration The Call Pickup Group assignments determine the order calls are picked up i e if two calls are ringing in the call pickup group the call ringing the first member will be picked up first 130 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Extension Direct Pickup Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialing the number of the ringing extension Operation To use Extension Direct Pickup Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code default 704 3 Dial the number of the ringing extension Extension number or outside phone num ber displays 4 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 02 Intercom Voice Call Pickup e FFI 2 Dial Plan Considerations N A Tru
216. erified Account Codes Non verified Account codes are voluntary codes i e You do not have to enter an account code before making a call You can assign Non verified Account codes to both incoming and outgoing calls To assign an account code to an outgoing call you enter the account code before making the call or during the call To assign an account code to an incoming call you enter the account code during the call Operation To enter an account code before making a call Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Account Code feature code default 8 Enter Account displays 3 Enter the Account Code up to 10 digits Specified account code displays 4 Press the key Entered Account displays 5 Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code CO Key LED lights 6 Dial the phone number Dialed phone number displays 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 113 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation To enter an account code during an outside call Action Result 1 During a call press the AUTO key 2 Press the key Enter Account displays 3 Enter the Account Code up to 10 digits Specified account code displays 4 Press the key Display returns to call state Verified Account Codes Stations restricted from outside call origination by Toll Restriction Service TRS can be
217. extension number 4 Replace the handset To cancel DND for another extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code default 750 3 Dial the extension number 4 Replace the handset Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Manual DND Override Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Forced DND Override e FF1 0 03 Extension COS DND Set Clear e FF1 0 03 Extension COS DND Set Clear Other e FF1 2 Dial Plan e FF3 0 Extension COS Considerations e Forced DND override is available e DND override function is available by Busy Override code 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 273 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation as en CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 3 Description Flash send allows you to send a flash to a CO line Operation To send a flash on a CO line Action Result 1 Hookflash to place the current CO call on hold Dial tone is returned 2 Press the SLT Flash Send access code default 765 A flash is sent on the CO line The CO line will respond according Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan e FF5 5 Hot Line Considerations N A Hot Line CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre assigned extension or speed di
218. ey when your call is answered 6 To add additional parties to the call press the HOLD key and repeat steps 3 5 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS 8 Party Conference Extension COS Considerations e A Conference Card VB 44120 must be installed in the System in order to use Eight party Conferencing e If the originating party hangs up the conference call will be disconnected If any other party hangs up the conference call will remain in progress 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 227 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Do Not Disturb CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do Not Disturb DND feature When DND is activated calls to that extension receive busy tone You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension Operation To set DND for your own extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the DND Set Cancel code default 720 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To cancel DND for your own extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the DND Set Cancel code default 720 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To set DND for a
219. fhook Voice Announce 235 Paging 236 Meet Me Answer 237 Reset Call 237 Speed Dialing 238 Personal Speed Dial 238 System Speed Dial 240 Speed Dial Linking 241 Timed Reminder Call 242 Trunk Access 243 Direct Trunk Access 244 MCO Trunk Access 244 Trunk Queuing 245 Walking TRS Class of Service 246 202 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Digital Single Line Telephone Figure 5 illustrates the Digital Single Line Telephone DSLT For more information on DSLT operation see the Digital SLT User s Guide Section 790 Figure 5 DSLT Panasonic L3 c LI c 229 e LI Cj Cj c gt Cj L Cj EJ LI 2 8C HJKL gry i ce Account Codes CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times numbers called and outside line numbers used This information is printed for each account on the System Message Detail Recording SMDR record In addition verified account codes may be used to change the TRS level to allow calls to numbers otherwise restricted Account codes may be either forced or unforced voluntary and either verified or unverified 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA
220. fied group for calls made to a member extension in the group If the called member of the hunt group is busy the System begins hunting forward to the end of the group If no member is available the system hunts backward from the called member If no member is available extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time the call is queued for the first member to become available You can also set the Queuing Timer and specify how the long the System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls can be directed to start with a selected portion of the hunting group based on the directed number However all members are eventually searched Circular Hunt Group Circular Hunt Group initiates hunting in a specified group for calls made to a member extension in the group If the called member of the hunt group is busy the System begins hunting forward to the end of the group and then moves forward from the first member of the group If no member is available extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time the call is queued for the first member to become available You can also set the Queuing Timer and specify how the long the System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls can be directed
221. g Statement The following statement applies if you purchased backup batteries with your system The product you have purchased contains rechargeable batteries The batteries are recycla ble At the end of their useful life under various state and local laws it may be illegal to dis pose of these batteries into the municipal waste stream Check with your local solid waste officials for details on recycling options or proper disposal The contents of this document are subject to change without notice and do not constitute a commitment on the part of Panasonic Telecommunication Systems Company PTSC Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document However due to ongoing product improvements and revisions Panasonic cannot guarantee the accuracy of printed material after the date of publication nor can it accept responsibility for errors or omissions Panasonic will update and revise this document as needed The software and hardware described in this document may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the license pertaining to said software or hardware Copyright 1998 by Panasonic Telecommunication Systems Company PTSC All rights reserved Contents Chapter 1 About This Manual 11 Chapter 2 List of Features 13 Chapter 3 System Features 19 AEG Discorineck acisini olere
222. ge 79 See Example 2 Small display phone on page 80 Notes Press the key to erase a single entry Press the key to enter a space 10 Repeat steps 8 9 as many times as necessary to enter the desired speed dial name Note Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry 11 Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next extension number displays 12 To set additional extension names press the volume up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired SSD 86 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance Action Result 13 Repeat steps 8 12 until all extension names are entered 14 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode Enter EXT displays 15 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key OR To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF key 81 User MAINT displays OR ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A et Veritie ccount Codes Description For a description of Verified Account Codes see Verified Account Codes on page 114 You can enter up to 500 Verified Account codes The System will store them in memory as valid codes Once the codes are entered here a Toll Restriction Service TRS Class of Service COS can be used with each code You can then enter your code on someone else s phone to bypass
223. hange the TRS level to allow calls to numbers otherwise restricted Account codes may be either forced or unforced voluntary and either verified or unverified This feature works with Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Before making an outgoing call a station user can silently enter an accounting or client billing code Then later the SMDR reports will show the Code dialed for each call and even sort the report by these Codes There are two different types of account codes you can use in the DBS 576 Non Verified Account Codes Non Verified Codes aren t checked by the system for validity the user can enter anything from 1 10 digits long Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced Account Codes the user must enter a code for every call or voluntary Account Codes the user can enter a code but doesn t have to for each call Non Verified Account Codes can be assigned to outgoing calls The user either enters the Code before accessing an outside line for forced or voluntary Codes Verified Account Codes Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a 4 digit code that has been preprogrammed into an Account Code Table It is possible to enter up to 10 digits for a Verified Account Code however only the first 4 digits will be used to verify the code These codes can also be either forced or voluntary You can program these codes with their own Toll Restriction Service TRS Class assignment so that whe
224. he desired PSD bin number 13 Repeat steps 10 12 until all PSD numbers are entered 14 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 OR User MAINT displays To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF OR key ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A Set Personal Speed Dial Names Description For a description of Personal Speed Dial PSD see Personal Speed Dial on page 179 for a Digital Key Telephone Personal Speed Dial on page 238 for a Digital Single Line Telephone DSLT and Personal Speed Dial on page 282 for a Single Line Telephone SLT 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 77 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Operation To set PSD names using either a large display or small display phone Action Result If not already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on page 75 81 User MAINT displays 2 At the 81 level enter 01 3 Press the HOLD key 8101 PSD Assignment displays 4 Enter 1 5 Press the HOLD key 1 PSD Name displays 6 Press the HOLD key EXT Number displays 7 Dial the extension number 8 Press the HOLD key Enter PSD XXX displays where XXX dialed extension number 9 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 10 Press the HOL
225. he last digit of the next extension number 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 237 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Example You dial extension 213 but it is busy To dial extension 214 enter 4 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan Considerations second extension called using the Reset Call feature must have the same number of digits as the first extension e If you program the System for Reset Call the following features are not available Camp on Ext no 2 Callback Request Ext no 3 Message Waiting Ext no 4 Ext no 5 Intercom Busy Override Ext no 9 Speed Dialing CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The System supports the following speed dial features e Personal Speed Dial PSD e System Speed Dial SSD e Speed Dial Linking e Speed Dial Name Assignment Personal Speed Dial You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored in PSD bins numbered 80 99 Operation To assign PSD numbers Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 Dial the phone number Press the HOLD key Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Ox ni ns E oES 238 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Se
226. he mode may be manually changed at any time For instance the System can be set to automatically enter Day 1 mode at 8 00 a m on weekdays and enter Night mode at 5 00 p m on weekdays All incoming calls TRS and attendant group handling would change accordingly On Saturday and Sunday the System would stay in Night mode The Automatic Day Night modes may be set in User Maintenance See Set Mode Schedule on page 9 Set Special Day Mode on page 93 Set Exception Day Mode on page 99 and Set Day of Week Mode on page 101 Hardware Requirements N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 39 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Related Programming e N A Considerations e You can only set Automatic Day Night modes on a system wide basis If tenant groups require separate Day Night modes you must set these modes manually e You can manually override Automatic Day Night modes See Manual Day Night Mode on page 38 Digital Pad Description Digital pad settings allow adjustment of call levels for different call types There are 29 pad classes in the System For pad class a volume adjustment is assigned for a connection to any pad class assignment The volume adjustment is between 30dB and 30 dB There are 8 extension pad classes and 16 trunk pad classes In addition there are pad classes for conference calls page port MFR RAI Modem and Conference Call Unit One pad class is curr
227. hen the call is answered inform the third party of the transfer Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON OFF key To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number Action Result While on a call press HOLD key Intercom dial tone Seize a trunk line and dial the number to which the call is to be transferred When the call is answered inform the third party of the transfer Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON OFF key 222 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Unsupervised Transfer When completing an unsupervised transfer the transferring party hangs up before the third party answers Operation To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number to which the call is to be trans ferred 3 Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON OFF key To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer Action Result While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone Enter a trunk access code Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred Am mi Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or
228. hone 141 SLT 269 SLT 268 Centrex PBX Compatibility 28 Changing Display Contrast Display Information 147 Circular Hunt Group 47 CIT Capability 36 Class of Service Walking TRS 198 Class of Service Ext Ext Restriction 30 Class of Service Extension Feature 30 Class of Service Trunk to Trunk Restriction 32 Class of Service Trunk Tie 29 Class of Service COS 29 CO Line Key Trunk Access 191 CO Ringing Mode Alarm Ringing 62 BLF Ringing 61 Day Ringing 60 Delayed Ringing 60 Slide Ringing 62 CO Ringing Types 32 DID Ringing 32 DIL 33 DISA 33 Multiple Ringing 34 CO Trunk Interface 34 CO Trunk Interface DID 34 CO Trunk Interface ISDN PRI 35 CO Trunk Interface Loop Start 36 Key Telephone 143 SLT 270 Connection Tandem 57 Console DSS 72 150 EM 24 151 Customizing Tool 59 D Data Security 37 Date Setting 75 Day Setting 75 Day Mode Automatic 39 Day Day 2 37 Manual 38 Day of Week Mode Setting 101 Day Ringing 60 Day Night Mode Automatic 39 Manual 38 Day Night System Mode 37 Delayed Ringing 60 Devices Programming 59 Dialing Onhook DSLT 234 Key Telephone 175 Dialing Analysis 292 294 Dialing Restriction During Inbound Calls 292 DID Trunk Interface 34 Compatibility ae Centrex PBX 28 Digit Modify Table 295 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Capability 36 Digital Key Telephones Conference Calls Extension Interface 43 Busy Override Digital Pad 40 DSLT 208 Digital Pad Class 40 Key Telephone
229. ial tone Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Trunk Queuing e Extension COS Considerations e Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be canceled e The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make a call using the MCO Trunk Access feature 288 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features Walking TRS Class of Service Walking TRS Class of Service allows an extension user to carry his or her toll restrictions to another phone Before the Walking TRS Class of Service feature can be used a Walking Class of Service code must be entered at your extension before using dialing privileges at another extension Operation To use a Walking Class of Service code Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key of an extension Intercom dial tone other than your own Enter 87 Dial your extension number Enter your Walking Class of Service code 0001 9999 Enter a trunk access code 9 or 81 84 9 a itas Dial the phone number Walking Class of Service remains in effect until you replace the handset Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF8 1 08 Walking Class of Service Code Considerations
230. ignated as hot on an extension by extension basis The Hot Dial Pad allows the user to initiate a call without going offhook Extensions with the Hot Dial Pad enabled can initiate calls by pressing any of the numeric keys 0 9 The and keys are not hot The Dial Pad can be hot under these conditions e When the extension is idle When the extension is holding a call e When the extension is receiving a page The Dial Pad cannot be hot under these conditions e When a call is ringing at the extension intercom or CO When the extension is on a call Related Programming FF3 0 Hot Dial Pad Considerations Paging The Hot Dial Pad cannot be used to initiate a page Hot Line CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre assigned extension or speed dial number simply by lifting the handset You do not have to dial any digits Operation 160 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To immediately connect to a pre assigned extension or speed dial number Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Automatically connected to pre assigned extension or speed dial number Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF5 5 Hot Line Considerations N A Intercom Calling CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions
231. in number Note Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programed into speed dialing For instructions see Speed Dialing on page 238 5 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To cancel Call Forwarding No Answer Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 733 For another extension enter 753 3 If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension dial the extension number 4 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb The System allows you to set or cancel both Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb DND for your own extension in one step To cancel Call Forwarding and DND Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the CF DND All Clear code default 7 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 213 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward All Busy No Answer and DND Cancel FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward AIl Calls FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward Busy FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward No Answer FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward Other FF1
232. ing e FF2 SMDR for Outbound Calls for Analog E amp M Tie Line and ISDN e FF2 SMDR for Inbound Calls for Analog E amp M Tie Line and ISDN e FF1 006 Serial Port Receive Data e 1 009 SMDR Output Format Hardware Requirements e A printer or external call accounting system is required to receive SMDR data Considerations A call must be answered to generate SMDR data e g answered by Voicemail call pickup etc e You can specify which type of SMDR data format is sent 1 either Format 1 or 2 loll Restriction Service Description Toll Restriction Service TRS allows access levels including the prohibition of long distance calls or after hours calls to be assigned to specific extensions or CO lines This minimizes non business related calls and reduces phone bills by only allowing long distance calls over designated lines TRS can be used in conjunction with Automatic Route Selection ARS e TRS classes are set on an extension and trunk basis Up to 50 TRS classes can be assigned e TRS class is then assigned to a TRS level This level is used as the basis for allowing or restricting calls e There 10 TRS levels available 0 denies all calls 1 8 may be partially restrictive per assignments and 9 allows all calls TRS can restrict the number of digits dialed 1 to 20 digits limit or no limit e TRS can restrict the use of System Speed Dials SSDs for out dialing on a TRS class basis
233. ing either a large display or small display phone Action Result 1 Ifnot already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main 81 tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on User MAINT displays page 75 2 At the 81 level enter 02 3 Press the HOLD key 8102 SSD Assignment displays 4 Enter 1 5 Press the HOLD key 1 SSD Name displays 6 Press the HOLD key Enter SSD displays 7 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 000 799 8 Press the HOLD key A B C D E F XXX displays where XXX SSD bin number 9 Enter the SSD name If using a large display phone press the soft key next to the desired row of letters See Example 1 on page 79 f using a small display phone press the appropriate one touch key See Example 2 on page 80 Note Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data 10 Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter See Example 1 Large display phone on page 79 See Example 2 Small display phone on page 80 Notes Press the key to erase a single entry Press the key to enter a space 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 83 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Action Result 11 Repeat steps 9 10 as many times as necessary to enter the desired SSD name Note Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry 12 Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next SSD bin number dis
234. irements of the Voice Mail system answer code may be up to 4 characters and consist of the characters 0 9 and pause e If the called extension does not answer and is forwarded to Voice Mail the DBS 576 sends a Call Forward ID code back to the Voice Mail system e During transmission of the answer signal code other DTMF digits and functions from the DBS 5776 extension are ignored e Voice Mail port must be assigned as a Voice Mail port connection The DTMF pattern is set as pattern 2 Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail allows you to call forward to a third party Voice Mail system The ID Code sends the digits that are required by the Voice Mail to identify the System extension 68 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Operation To set a Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail Action Result 1 Go offhook or press ON OFF key 2 Dial the Call Forward ID Code default 715 Enter V M ID displays 3 Enter the ID code required by voice mail see your voice mail manual Usually this is the extension number 4 Press the HOLD key Stored V M ID displays 5 Go onhook or press ON OFF key To clear the ID Code Action Result Go offhook or press ON OFF key Dial the Call Forward ID Code default 715 Enter V M ID displays Pres
235. is performed the remaining held call would be the call transferred not the parked call Call Pickup CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The System allows the following types of call pickup e Extension Group Pickup Extension Direct Pickup e Trunk Group Pickup e Trunk Direct Pickup Extension Group Pickup Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call within your extension pickup group or in a different pickup group without having to dial the number of the ringing extension Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available e Call Pickup All Calls You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension group e Call Pickup External Calls You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own extension group e Specified Group Pickup You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension group 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 263 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Operation To use Extension Group Pickup All Calls Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Extension Group Pickup All Calls code default 701 3 Complete the call and replace the handset To use Extension Group Pickup External Calls Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Extension Group Pickup External Calls code default 702
236. ised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To assign a feature code or extension number to a one touch key Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Press the PROG key Press the one touch key to be programmed Sarl ssa al If the System is set for MCO Code level press the following keys AUTO Otherwise proceed to step 5 Enter the desired feature code or extension number 6 Press the HOLD key 7 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key n To check a programmed one touch key Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Press the CONF key C displays 3 Press the one touch key to be checked Programmed data displays 4 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming e FF8 1 PSD Numbers e FF8 1 PSD Names Considerations e One touch keys 1 10 are the same as Personal Speed Dial PSDs numbers 80 89 Onhook Dialing CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Onhook Dialing is a standard feature for key telephones where you can dial onhook using the dialpad one touch keys or FF keys 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 175 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Operation To dial onhook Action Result 1
237. ised 6 11 98 191 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Direct Trunk Access e Extension COS Considerations N A MCO Line Preference MCO Line Preference allows you to place an outside call by simply picking up the handset When you go offhook the MCO 1 trunk group is automatically accessed Operation To place a call using MCO Line Preference Action Result 1 Lift the handset Outside dial tone CO XXX displays where XXX trunk number 2 Dialthe phone number Dialed phone number displays Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming e FFI MCO Trunk Access e FF5 2 Trunk Groups Outbound Considerations e You can press the ON OFF key to get intercom dial tone MCO Trunk Access The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group You can seize an idle trunk from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code Operation 192 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To seize an idle trunk Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the trunk access number 9 or 81 84 See Table 14 Outside dial tone CO XXX displays where XXX trunk number 3 Dial the phone number Dialed phone number displays Hardwar
238. isplay or small display phone Action Result 1 Ifnot already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main 81 tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on User MAINT displays page 75 2 At the 81 level enter 09 3 Press the HOLD key 8109 TRF of CFWD displays 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 105 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Action Result Enter 1 Press the HOLD key CFWD NOANS Ext displays Dial the extension number Press the HOLD key Enter CODE displays Enter the destination extension ses HOCH el SON Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next extension number displays set Call Forward No Answer destinations for additional extensions press the volume up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired Extension Repeat steps 9 11 until all extension are entered Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key OR To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF key 81 User MAINT displays OR ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations Set Caller ID Logging Extensions N A Description Total Number of Number of Cabinets Call Log Extensions 20 40 60 80 100 Nil nt AJS NJ e
239. istance allowed during day mode restrict special calling numbers 976 1900 outside operator etc 911 always allowed 10 purchaser buyer telephones no time restriction restrict special calling numbers 976 1900 outside operator etc 911 always allowed 25 executive office telephones no time restriction no calling restrictions 2attendant group phones no restrictions during the day local calls only at night to prevent abuse 7 warehouse phones extension and 911 emergency calling only Trunks 1 24 are in Trunk Group 1 and are to the local CO for local calls In addition long distance carriers are accessed using these trunks 298 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Implementation The configuration of this system is described in the following steps 1 The system needs are listed in Table 1 Example User Needs Worksheet on page 300 Most of the information is straight forward The Day TRS and Night TRS classes are determined by assigning consecutive Class numbers to each unique calling need When a duplicate need is encountered the same class number is assigned The system trunk equipment is listed in Table 2 Example MCO Tenant Trunk Groups Worksheet on page 301 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 299 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation Table A 1 Example User Need
240. itional cabinets and related cabinet hardware cabling required for expansion when the System is expanded the CPC card and or TSW cards may need to be upgraded as well The CPC96 supports up to 96 ports The CPC288 supports up to 288 ports and should be combined with time switch card TSW288 The CPC 576 supports up to 576 ports and should be combined with time switch card TSW576 Built In Voice Processing Unit Description The System supports the Built in Voice Processing Unit This unit assists in providing reliable effective communications This is a simple device that includes an automated attendant function and can be used to record conversations where permitted 26 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features The Built in Voice Processing Unit is easy to install It is installed in a cabinet card slot and no cabling is required Some of the major features include e Automated attendant e Automatic recording for incoming and outgoing calls e One touch mail box transfer Mail box status display Key LED on digital telephone Mail box grouping e 2 way recording e Outside notification e Date time stamp e Integrated Liquid Crystal Display LCD control with large LCD telephone e Message light control e Upto254 mail boxes e Up to 40 hours of message storage time e Up to 8 voice ports For more information see the System Built In Voice Processing Unit Reference Manual
241. k ends The fourth pattern selects the FX lines to Birmingham and selects a digit modify pattern that removes the first 4 digits dialed 1205 so that the call originates at the CO as a local call The fifth pattern selects the Out WATS trunks No digit modification is required for these trunks Table 17 Example Route Table Digit Modify Pattern Route Pattern Trunk Group 0 not modified 1 50 1 1 Local CO 0 2 1 Local CO to Carrier A Day preferred 101XXXX 1 3 1 Local CO to Carrier B Night Weekend preferred 101Y YY Y 2 4 2 FX to Birmingham 3 5 3 Out WATS 0 Table A 18 Example Digit Modify Table Route Table Delete Digits Add Digits Digit Modify Pattern Prefix up to 24 digits Prefix up to 10 Add Digits Suffix up to 10 101XXXX 101YYYY 324 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Index Index A About User Programming 74 Access Codes MCO Trunk DSLT 245 Key Telephone 193 SLT 287 Access Groups Trunks 66 Account Codes DSLT 203 Key Telephone 112 Non verified Key Telephone 113 SLT 251 Non Verified ID DSLT 204 SLT 251 Verified ID DSLT 205 Key Telephone 114 SLT 252 Alarm Ringing 62 Analog Device Capability Extension Interface 44 Analyze Digits Table 293 294 ANSWER key 154 ARS and TRS Operation 291 ARS Configuration and Operation 306 ARS Level 294 ARS TRS Fe
242. keys are available VM Transfer Key 1 will transfer to a voice mail extension number Voice Mail Transfer Key 2 will transfer to the voice mail pilot number Operation To assign a Voice Mail Transfer key from a phone Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Press the PROG key 3 Press the FF key to be assigned as the Voice Mail Transfer key 4 Press REDIAL and 74nnnn VM Transfer Key 1 where nnnn is the voice mail extension number or Press REDIAL and 75nnnn VM Transfer Key 2 where nnnn is the voice mail extension number 8 Press the HOLD key 9 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To use a Voice Mail Transfer key Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key to answer the Connected to caller incoming call 2 Press the VM TRF 1 or2 key System places caller on hold 3 Press the DSS BLF key dial an extension number or select the extension from the extension directory on the large dis play telephone 4 Replace the handset or press the RELEASE ON OFF or PROG key 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 71 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Once a call is sent to the voice mail after the voice mail answers the system sends the VM Transfer ID 1 or 2 the extension number BLF DSS Directory or dialed number Hardware RequirementsN A N A Related Prog
243. keys through system programming Flexible Function Keys CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 AII Versions Description You can assign frequently used functions to programmable keys on key phones DSS 72 consoles and EM 24 consoles All keys not already assigned as line or speed dialing keys are available for programming You can store either Fixed Feature codes or Flexible Feature codes in an FF key The LED of the Flexible Function FF key will not light when digits are stored in the key Fixed Feature codes are hard coded and cannot be changed Most features however can also be assigned flexible codes according to the System Dial Plan This allows the flexible codes to be changed in the dial plan without having to re program extensions When a flexible code is programmed into an FF key or soft key the System translates the flexible code into the fixed code You can use either the Fixed Feature code or your System s Flexible Feature code when programming FF keys Table 13 on page 154 reflects both Fixed Feature codes and the System defaults for Flexible Feature codes Operation To assign Fixed Feature codes to an FF key Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Press the PROG key F displays 3 Press the FF key to be programmed Enter Function displays 4 Press the REDIAL key 5 Enter the code to be programmed See Table 13 on page Programmed code disp
244. l Numbers Description For a description of Personal Speed Dial PSD see Personal Speed Dial on page 179 for a Digital Key Telephone Personal Speed Dial on page 238 for a Digital Single Line Telephone DSLT and Personal Speed Dial on page 282 for a Single Line Telephone SLT Operation To set PSD numbers Action Result 1 If not already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main 81 tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on User MAINT displays page 75 2 Atthe 81 level enter 01 76 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenan ce Action Result 3 Press the HOLD key 8101 PSD Assignment displays 4 Press the HOLD key 0 PSD Number displays 5 Press the HOLD key EXT Number displays 6 Dial the extension number 7 Press the HOLD key Enter PSD XXX displays where XXX dialed extension number 8 Enter the PSD bin number 80 99 9 Press the HOLD key YYY ZZ displays where XXX extension number Y Y Y assigned name and ZZ PSD bin number 10 Enter the PSD digits to be dialed Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key 11 Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next PSD bin number displays 12 To set additional PSD numbers press the volume up and Desired PSD bin number displays down key or press the HOLD key to move to t
245. l Single Line 203 ACCOUNT CodeS i wince mers x bk MUR eee QUA RUE Roe REOR AC B oce a hee 203 Non Verified Account Codes 204 Verified Account 5 es 205 Attendant Group Calls 0000 eee 206 Auto Repeat Dial ete cia hau nh ON eee eee 207 Background MUsIC iuis Osee we ieee o a ie ies 207 BUSY OVGINGG dated EI Ra ee Deed Newer eke R F Nuda 208 Callback Request ornate eel eee Oe wane we a ae ee 209 Call De D he nae 210 Call Forwarding All Calls 210 Gall Forwarding eater ead wee gee ened ad 211 Call Forwarding No 212 Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb 0 0 0 es 213 Call HONG METTI 214 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 7 Contents Section 700 Operation system 2255 2 et RR o eel eo eee a EM citat 214 Floating Hell ees x Re A eco e E Ca ce ee a o Sce Ac der d te wack 215 Exclusive Hold 4a oae re Paid axe m artes e Ro loe Fas md an 2 216 Brokers HOIU S 4 s peers tute safe e ee dta etd iate 217 Gall Park RR n ER CREDO D Ce e tom i ec 217 Gall PICKUP cua voe r
246. lays 154 6 Press the HOLD key Programmed function name displays 7 Repeat steps 2 6 to program additional keys 8 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 152 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To assign Flexible Feature Codes to an FF key Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Press the PROG key F displays Press the FF key to be programmed Enter Function displays Sl sca ps Enter the code to be programmed See Table 13 on page 154 Programmed code displays d Press the HOLD key Programmed function name displays Repeat steps 2 5 to program additional keys Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To erase a code stored on an FF key Note You cannot use the following procedure to clear FF keys that have been assigned as CO lines CO line keys can only be cleared through system programming Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Press the PROG key Press the FF key that was programmed Programmed code displays 09 95 cese Press the HOLD key Cleared Function displays To check a programmed FF key Display Phone Only Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Press the CONF key C displa
247. le member to receive the call If no member is available extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time the call is queued for the first member to become available You can also set the Queuing Timer to specify how long the System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension The main advantage of this type of hunting is that the same hunting order is taken for all calls This is useful in presenting calls to selected members first 46 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Pilot Distributed Hunt Group Pilot Distributed Hunt Group directs calls to a pilot number The System reviews who received the last call and begins hunting with the next member If the last member in the group is reached and no member is available the hunt continues with the first member and proceeds forward After a complete search and no available member is found extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time the call is queued for the first member to become available You can also set the Queuing Timer and specify how the long the System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls are evenly distributed throughout the group Switch Back Hunt Group Switch Back Hunt Group initiates hunting in a speci
248. lephone messages To respond to voice mail messages from a 3rd party voice mail system you need to set the Message Key ID code to identify the caller to the voice mail system You can also use the Message key to program a voice mail password Operation To set the Message Key ID code Action Result 1 If not already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main 81 tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on User MAINT displays page 75 2 Atthe 81 level enter 06 3 Press the HOLD key 8106 MSG Key ID Code displays 4 Press the HOLD key MSGID EXT Numbe displays 5 Dial the extension number of the phone being programmed 6 Press the HOLD key MSG ID EXT XXX displays where XXX extension number 7 Enter the Message Key ID code Notes The ID code may contain up to 16 digits and contain 0 1 9 pause REDIAL key To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key 8 Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next extension number displays 9 To set additional Message Key ID codes press the volume Desired extension number displays up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired extension 10 Repeat steps 7 9 until all Message Key ID codes are set 11 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode MSGID EXT Numbe displays 12 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 OR User MAINT displays To exit the User Maintenance
249. ll control With this module there is a physical connection between your telephone line and PC Service Provider Interface SPI software must be installed on the PC to enable the capabilities of TAPI on the System for each specially enabled telephone Typical desktop applications include Contact Managers Personal Organizers and Personal Answering Machines Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A 36 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Data Security Description If you are using a line for data modem connections etc Data Security makes it possible to prevent interruptions Data Security can be implemented for either all phone use or outside line use Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A Day Night System Mode Description Day Night System Mode enables you to switch the System between two Day modes and a Night mode These modes determine incoming call handling Toll Restriction Service TRS call handling and attendant group support While in a Night mode generally used at night or any time when your office is closed incoming calls can ring at selected extensions e g a night watchman s extension or an extension connected to an answering machine Outbound calls can be restricted to certain phones Calls can be directed to a nighttime attendant group instead of th
250. ll look at any number that starts with 1 A is available as a wild card This represents any single digit 1 9 When prefix dial is being considered by the system the system looks for the longest exact match first The system will consider a wildcard last For instance 911 is considered before 11 or even Notice also in this example there are multiple entries that begin with 9 If the leading digits are not enough to determine the handling of the call then additional digits can be considered by entering a Prefix ID that references entries in the Analyze Digits Table Otherwise the Prefix ID is left blank and the additional items are considered In this example we cross reference Prefix ID 1 in the Analyze Digits Table for any dialed number that begins with 1 The remaining digits are analyzed in the Analyze Digits Table From Table 1 Example User Needs Worksheet on page 300 and Table 3 Example Origination TRS Level Plan on page 302 the restriction levels are determined for each type of dialed call Route Type and Route Pattern Number are not used with TRS only operation Table A 5 Example Leading Digits Worksheet Restriction Prefix 1D TRS Level Go to this Route Type Route Pattern Pattern Prefix Dial Number of Any Number Number up to 10 Prefix ID in Following Origination Route Table 0 R Table 1 200 Analyze nM TRS at this Route List 1 oute
251. lse DP trunk Extension Interface The System supports a full array of extension devices including the following Panasonic s proprietary key telephones e Standard analog devices e Dial Pulse DP Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF Single Line Telephone SLT e Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI S point devices e ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI S point devices Digital Key Telephones The System supports the complete line of Panasonic proprietary 44 Series Digital Key Telephones as well as the Digital Single Line Telephone DSLT These models include 16 Button Standard Telephone in Gray VB 44210G and Black VB 44210B e 22 Button Standard Telephone in Gray VB 44220G and Black VB 44220B e 22 Button Display Speakerphone in Gray VB 44223G and Black VB 44223B e 22 Button Voice Response Compatible Display Speakerphone in Gray VB 44224G and Black VB 44224B e 22 Button Large display Speakerphone in Gray VB 44225G and Black VB 44225B e 34 Button Standard Telephone in Gray VB 44230G and Black V B 44230B e 34 Button Display Speakerphone in Gray VB 44233G and Black VB 44233B e EM24 24 Button Expansion Module in Gray VB 44310G and Black VB 44310B e DSS 72 72 Button DSS BLF in Gray VB 44320G and Black VB 44320B e DSLT VB 41200 In addition to the above Digital Key Telephone models the System supports the complete line of the older Panasonic proprietary 43 se
252. ly forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 Call Hold CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description The System provides the following types of Call Hold or Call Park System Hold Floating Hold Exclusive Hold Broker s Hold Station Call Park System Hold You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold You can retrieve a call placed on System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call Operation To place a call on System Hold Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone Hold CO XXX displays where outside line number To retrieve a call placed on System Hold from the extension that placed it there Action Result 1 Press the line key that is flashing green or press the HOLD key if a non appearing CO call line number CO displays where XXX outside 124 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To retrieve a call placed on System Hold from an extension other than the one that put it there Action Result 1 Press the line key that is flashing red CO XXX displays where XXX outside line number To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk Action Result 1 Lift the
253. ly redials extension Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Callback Request Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Callback Request Receive e FF3 0 Extension COS Considerations N A Call Forwarding CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension to an outside line or to voice mail Call Forwarding can be set or canceled under the following conditions from either your own extension or from an alternate extension 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 255 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding All Calls When Call Forwarding All Calls is set all incoming calls to an extension are immediately forwarded Operation To set Call Forwarding All Calls Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 721 For another extension enter 741 3 If setting Call Forwarding for another extension dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward 4 Enter the destination number If forwarding to another extension dial the extension number If forwarding to an outside number press the key then enter the SSD bin number Note Any outside number used for Call F
254. mode press the ON OFF OR key ON OFF LED goes off 90 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming N A Considerations et N A ode ocneaule Description For a description of Automatic Day Night System Mode see Automatic Day Night Mode on page 39 You can set the System to automatically enter None Day 1 Day2 Night Night 1 or Night 2 modes based upon mode patterns You can define up to 3 patterns with up to 5 modes for each day This menu allows the setting of the patterns Operation To set the Mode Schedule Action Result If not already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on page 75 81 User MAINT displays At the 81 level enter 07 Press the HOLD key 8107 System Mode displays Press the HOLD key 0 Mode Schedule displays Press the HOLD key 000 HHMM PTN 1 1 Start T displays Enter the start time in hours two characters and minutes two characters for the Pattern 1 first mode Note To clear an entry or existing data press the FLASH key Press the HOLD key 001 PTN 1 1 Mode displays Enter the desired mode for Pattern 1 first 0 None 1 Day 1 2 Day 2 3 Night 4 Night 1 5 Night 2 Note To cl
255. mping a Call Onto a Busy 268 Camp On Gall Waiting oc xk cr Io eee ERO eee 268 Conference erorri eee een ee ewe EAR RR Ea ee RR 270 Three Party Conferencing 2 2 0 0 20 270 Eight Party Conferencing at ees REINES E d Ud 271 Do Not Disturb DND rend amt mh RR ce ex exis 272 Flash ga ru ew acra e bs Duaci dba eri 274 HOU LING tae d ER WOES d aba eke wie i SQ aura UE 274 Intercom Calling ka Sian eA rok 275 Last Number Redial i ici cece ee saa uh ee ee 276 Offhook Signaling 225103 e 338 Rio eoa Rad Reh We eee CR 276 Offhook Voice Announce sseeeeeeeeeeeee enn nnn 278 Message Waiting Callback 278 Padlng iesu a EE E Ue dra EE xa na eR e ER XR 280 Meet Me AnSWGL vba RE x Wee ees a Rex erus as 280 Call cava theta e arsch a rae c able ner Berardi c e e i daba 281 Speed Dialing ois isse ek nh C e a DC ROC E 281 Personal Speed mpari nady Re S RE 282 System Speed Dial uos one SS RSEN e 283 speed Dial Linking sex ERR Meee aves e oie dee xx x8 Eaa he Seed vedo vata 284 Timed Reminder Call 24 5433 bar ee be reed WHERE Ya DER Fx T 285
256. n COS complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON OFF key If On Hook Transfer is disabled press the PROG key RELEASE key is using DSS 72 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 133 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Unsupervised Transfer When completing an unsupervised transfer the transferring party hangs up before the third party answers Operation To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number to which the call is to be trans ferred 3 Complete the transfer If On Hook transfer is enabled for your Extension COS replace the handset or press the ON OFF key If On Hook is disabled press the PROG key or RELEASE key if using DSS 72 To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer Action Result While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred BTepqe ue jr Complete the transfer f On Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON OFF key If On Hook Transfer is disabled press the PROG key RELEASE key is using DSS
257. n entered they will override the extension s TRS Class Thus Verified Account Code users can float from phone to phone placing calls that would normally be restricted on that phone Non Verified Account Codes Non Verified Account codes are voluntary codes 1 You do not have to enter an account code before making a call You can assign Non Verified Account codes to outgoing calls only To assign an account code to an outgoing call you enter the account code before making the call Operation To enter an account code before making a call Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Account Code feature code default 8 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 251 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Action Result Enter the Account Code up to 10 digits Press the key Enter a trunk access code expenses sta Dial the phone number Verified Account Codes Stations restricted from outside call origination by Toll Restriction Service TRS can be allowed to make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS After a call is made the SMDR record for the call will show the verified account code Operation To make an outside call that requires an account code Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone Enter the Verified Account ID code default 8 Ent
258. n finished Next PSD bin number displays 10 Toenter another speed dial name repeat steps 5 9 SSD Names To set SSD names using a large display or small display phone Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Press the PROG key Press the key Enter 1 for the SSD Name Assignment mode SSD NO gt SSD NAME displays Tx pee i Enter speed dial bin number 00 79 or 000 799 6 Press the HOLD key SSDXXX ABCDEF XXX displays where XXX specified SSD bin number 7 Press the FLASH key to clear the current data ABCDEF XXX displays where XXX specified SSD bin number 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 55 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Action Result 8 Enter the speed dial name If using a large display phone press the soft key next to the desired row of letters See Example 1 on page 52 If using a small display phone press the appropriate one touch key See Example 2 on page 53 9 Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter See Example 1 Large display phone on page 52 See Example 2 Small display phone on page 53 Notes Press the key to erase a single entry Press the key to enter a space 10 Repeat steps 8 9 as many times as necessary to enter the desired SSD name Note Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry
259. n name e Verified Account code e Call Forward ID code e Message Key ID code e Walking TRS Code e TRF of e CID Logging Ext e System mode You can set the System to handle incoming calls outbound call routing and built in voice mail call messages differently depending upon whether the system is in Day mode Day 2 mode or Night mode With User Maintenance you can program the System for mode schedule mode schedule for special day mode schedule for exception days and day of the month patterns About User Programming User Maintenance requires a Digital Display Key Telephone assigned to a Class of Service COS that allows User Maintenance The procedures in the following sections describe the basic steps used for modifying parameters However there are many alternative ways to view and modify the parameters using special keys and procedures Some of the more advanced keys include REDIAL At menu level clears an entry At data entry retrieves the last entry setting FLASH At menu level ignored At data entry clears setting ON OFF Begins programming log in or exits programming HOLD At menu level moves toward data entry level within the same address At data entry saves the displayed setting and moves to the next setting PROG Moves to the main menu CONF Moves to the first data setting AUTO Backs out of the address menu levels Menu Ignored PREV At menu level moves to the previous screen At data entry ignored
260. nd CPC card that matches the type installed must be used to copy the memory Related Programming e N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 49 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Considerations N A Music on Hold Description The System can provide Music on Hold MOH to parties on hold either CO line extension or network party The MOH feature can also be used to play announcements or advertisements if desired Hardware Requirements e The music source must be purchased separately It is not provided with the System Related Programming e N A Considerations N Important A license may be required from the American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers ASCAP or similar organizations to transmit radio or recorded music through the MOH feature Panasonic Telecommunication Systems Company its distributors and affiliates assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment fail to obtain such a license Name Assignments CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Names may be assigned to the following e Extensions e Trunks DIDs e Personal Speed Dials e Systems Speed Dials Trunks names and DID names must be assigned in dealer programming mode Extension names and Speed Dial names may be assigned from a display telephone This feature does not require the use of a DSS 72 console or entering the programming mode 50 DBS 576 USA Revised
261. nd you want to make a tone call enter 1 4 Speak when your call is answered 5 Replace the handset Hardware Hequirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Intercom Calling Type e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Voice Call Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Voice Call Receive e Extension COS Considerations Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling e You cannot change from voice calling to tone calling 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 275 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Last Number Redial CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialed Operation To automatically redial the last number dialed Action Result 1 Lift the handset 2 Enter 712 3 Complete the call and replace the handset Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Intercom Redialing Extension COS Considerations e Extension Class of Service COS determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both intercom and CO calls or CO calls only Offhook Signaling CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Offhook Signaling sends a tone over the handset to a busy extension to indicate that a CO call has arrived or a call is camped on Opera
262. ndant calls Call reversion Call forwarded to Attendant Hunt Group Automatic Call Distributor Description The System provides an optional Automatic Call Distributor ACD for efficient presentation handling and management of incoming calls to one or more groups of specialized users This optional Built in ACD is contained on a single circuit card that is installed in the System This built in capability eliminates the need for custom wiring and other installation Each specialized user is known as an ACD agent Each agent position is equipped with a large display telephone VB 44225 that provides Liquid Crystal Display LCD messages to assist the agent in handling calls The Built in ACD provides Up to 2 agent groups Up to 32 agent IDs per group Up to 64 agent IDs per system Up to 32 agents 1 supervisor ID per group Up to 2 supervisor IDs per system Up to 4 voice ports per group Up to 4 voice ports per system Music On Hold MOH source Main System MOH source 1 Management Information System MIS Monitor Port RS 232C 2 week memory for MIS reports Up to 6 recorded messages max 14 sec per message fixed message up to 5 minutes 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 23 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Hardware Requirements See Section 520 Built In ACD Reference Manual Related Programming e See Section 520 Built In ACD Reference Manual Consideration
263. ndset Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number Called party hears alert tone Calling party hears ringback tone 3 Remain on the line until the called party answers To use Manual Camp on Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number Busy tone 3 Enter the Camp On Call Waiting code default 2 Called party hears alert tone Calling party hears ringback tone 4 Remain on the line until the called party answers To answer a Camp on Call Waiting signal Action Result Replace the handset OR Hookflash 2 Liftthe handset again to be connected to the waiting call Current call placed on hold Connected to waiting call Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI 2 Dial Plan e FFI 0 03 Extension COS 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation FF3 Extension COS Considerations e You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp on See To camp a call onto a busy extension on page 266 Conference Calls CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation With the standard system configuration up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time If the option
264. nformation e Caller ID service must be ordered from the local telephone operating company or the interexchange carrier e Caller ID data is usually sent between the first and the second rings of the incoming trunk call The trunk may be programmed to immediately ring at the station or wait until after the Caller ID digits are received before ringing at the station If the trunk is programmed to ring immediately the Caller ID digits will not display until after they are received and processed e Caller ID numbers may be denied from being sent for some callers private Some long distance carriers may not provide Caller ID data out of area e Caller ID only support the single format number only Multiple format number and name is not supported Centrex PBX Compatibility Description Centrex PBX Compatibility allows the System to be connected behind centrex or PBX lines The System supports up to 6 access codes for dialing centrex or a PBX These access codes allow the System System Message Detail Recording SMDR output to exclude the number dialed to reach a centrex or PBX line 28 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features When connected behind a PBX or Centrex Toll Restriction Service TRS can be used to restrict calls The System also supports transmission of a flash signal over the centrex or PBX link Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming
265. ng a PC programmer all programming is available via a telephone This is especially useful for minor changes to the system configuration Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A PC Based Customizing Tool The System can be completely configured using the PC Based Customizing Tool This may be done either by directly connecting to the System or by remote connection using a modem The System database can be uploaded and downloaded for easy storage and retrieval The PC Based Customizing Tool connects to the System through the RS232C maintenance port Hardware Hequirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Ringing Modes Description The System supports multiple types of CO ringing including the following e 1 Day 2 Night Ringing e 1 Day 2 Night Delayed Ringing 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 59 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation e DID Day Night Ringing e DID Day Night Busy Delayed Ringing e Busy Lamp Field Ringing e Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing e Slide Ringing e Alarm Ringing Day 1 Day 2 Night Ringing When the System is in Day 1 mode calls can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt group per the Day 1 ringing assignments When the System is in Day 2 mode calls can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt group per the Day 2 ringing assignments When
266. nhook Dialing vds dura tr ard hes me xx x xoa d Va xxv E ek 175 neues aca eia rea dod op d qox dol card 176 Meet Me Answer pras meceni menere cece hh 177 R set Call irr esee tee aw ae eee ee 177 Ringing Line Preference 178 Speed Dialing oi ica da cece eee eee ene eee ee eee ee eae 179 Personal Speed Dial pevska nnii eae ee Pee Sees EE Ex AS Be ae NR 179 System Speed Dial oe tx Sete whe ke Su I Aden VE ole Meee no den 181 speed Dial Linking ah Xe eee XE EE ER NEW Ra bes 183 Speed Dial Name ASSIghImernts issuer p RR eed 185 Timed Reminder Call S020 irem eee Sek ee hed Oe CRGO Rd 189 Trunk 190 CO Line Key Trunk Access ee 191 Direct Trunk ACCESS Dove ee A ape hee Ok 191 MCO Line Preference 0000 eee 192 MCO Trunk ACCESS i uox cr eee ote hed eet XO TL 192 Tr nk QUEUING ee ee a ER re X Ve eens 194 Variable eed S DERE Ed eet onde we CERE Ro Bast Rem 195 Voice Recogniti n ieri ner a e ORA UR n DADA ARE 197 Volume Control riris siipra noveris gannan enter xXx ieee ee 197 Walking TRS Class of Service 198 Chapter 6 DSLT Featuresiic ssc chewed ete 201 Digita
267. nk Group Pickup Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO incoming trunk group Operation To use Trunk Group Pickup Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code default 709 Extension number or outside phone num ber displays 3 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 131 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Related Programming e FFI 2 Dial Plan e FF5 3 MCO Inbound Trunk Group Considerations N A Trunk Direct Pickup Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number Operation To use Trunk Direct Pickup Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code default 0 Dial the number of the ringing or holding system trunk Outside number displays Aq exe rl Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan Considerations e Calls in Exclusive Hold cannot be picked up Call Transfer CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 AII Versions Description The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an out
268. nother extension Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code default 740 Dial the extension number Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key OR cancel DND for another extension Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code default 750 Dial the extension number Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key zx eal eal a 228 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Manual DND Override Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Forced DND Override e FF1 0 03 Extension COS DND Set Clear e FF1 0 03 Extension COS DND Set Clear Other e FF1 2 Dial Plan e Extension COS Considerations e Forced DND override is available e DND override function is available by Busy Override code DP to DTMF Signal Conversion CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Dial Pulse DP to Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF Signal Conversion allows you to switch from DP to DTMF signaling when using a DP trunk For instance if you dial into a Voice Mail system using a DP trunk you can switch to DTMF signaling to communicate with the Voice Mail system The Syst
269. ns Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive Broker s Hold Broker s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by hookflash Operation To place a call on Broker s Hold Action Result 1 Pick up the first call 2 Hookflash First call on hold 3 Pick up the second call 4 Hookflash Second call on hold first call retrieved Hardware Requirements e N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 261 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Related Programming e 1 0 03 Extension COS Hookflash Control on SLTs Broker s Hold or Conference Extension COS Considerations e If Broker s Hold is enabled it is not possible to establish a conference call from an SLT position Call Park You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call even if you cannot locate the intended recipient of the call CO Extension and Network calls may be parked There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the DBS 576 One way is to park the call at the receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialing the park answer code plus the parking extension number The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call Operation To park a call on this extension Action Result 1 While on a call press the hookswit
270. ns The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six cabinet configuration These lines can be divided into 99 different trunk groups Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes System defaults for MCO trunk access codes are displayed in the following table MCO I can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature MCO access code is used for Automatic Route Selection ARS access code Table 16 MCO Trunk Access Codes MCO Group Trunk Access Code MCOI 9 MCO2 81 MCO3 82 MCO4 83 5 84 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 287 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Trunk Queuing CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description When you try to originate a call by MCO enter 9 and all outside lines in a trunk group are busy the System can call you when a line becomes free Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings Operation To set Trunk Queuing Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone Enter a trunk access code Busy tone Enter the Callback Request code default 3 Replace the handset SIU ES ROD Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone Action Result 1 Lift the handset Outside d
271. nsiderations Eight Party Conferencing With the optional Conference Card installed up to 8 parties can be included in a conference call However only one of the parties can be a CO line i e 8 extensions or 7 extensions and 1 CO line 226 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Operation To establish an eight party conference call from the idle status Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the Eight Party Conference code default 788 Press the HOLD key eae Enter trunk access code or dial the number of the exten sion you wish to add to the call 5 If you entered a trunk access code in step 4 dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call Otherwise proceed to step 6 6 Press the CONF key when your call is answered Connected to called party 7 To add additional parties to the call repeat steps 3 6 To establish an eight party conference call from your current call Action Result 1 While on call press the HOLD key Current call on hold 2 Enter the Eight Party Conference code default 788 3 Enter a trunk access code or dial the number of the exten sion you wish to add to the call 4 Ifyou entered a trunk access code in step 3 dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call 5 Press the CONF k
272. number until it is completed Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A ime eminaer ca CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature 242 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Operation To set the Timed Reminder Call feature Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Timed Reminder Set code default 31 3 Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound Enter the time in 24 hour format For example 0100 for 1 AM 1300 for 1 PM 4 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code default 39 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming N A Considerations e An alarm tone default 60 seconds will be issued at the specified time e An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time To change the Reminder Call simply enter a new time e Ifthe extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled the reminder call is issued 3 minutes later Trunk Access CPC 96 CP
273. o 2 Way Box for Cabinet 4 64 box no 2 Way Box for Cabinet 5 65 box no 2 Way Box for Cabinet 6 66 box no 2 Way Retrieve Messages 5 box no 2 Way Access 50 2 Way End 5 1 2 Way Re Record 52 2 Way Pause 53 2 Way Store 54 2 Way Add 55 2 Way Cancel 56 2 Way Notify 57 2 Way Copy 58 2 Way MF Send 59 ACD 1 Log In Out Button 80 ACD 1 Work Unit 8 1 Work Unit 00 99 ACD 1 Unavailable Button 82 ACD 2 Log In Out Button 85 ACD 2 Work Unit 86 Work Unit 00 99 ACD 2 Unavailable Button 87 Speed Dial Send Button 01 SSD or PSD 80 Designated CO Access Button for outgoing calls 8 Verified ID Code Send 03 89 Floating Hold Answer 04 9 Priority Message Waiting Send 05 41 Priority Message Waiting Cancel 06 40 Message Waiting Cancel 07 5 Message Waiting Callback 08 6 Call Forward All Set 70 Extension 0 9999 721 Extension 0 9999 Call Forward All Clear 09 731 Extension 0 9999 mi Call Forward All Clear from ll 751 another extension Call Forward No Answer Set 71 Extension 0 9999 723 Extension 0 9999 Call Forward No Answer Clear 12 733 Extension 0 9999 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features
274. o a Busy Extension on page 223 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 225 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Conference Calls CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation With the standard system configuration up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time If the optional Conference Card is installed up to 8 parties can participate in a conference call The System supports the following types of Conference Calls e Three Party Conferencing e Eight Party Conferencing Three Party Conferencing The System supports the following types of three party conference calls 3 extensions 2 extensions and 1 CO line 1 extension and 2 CO lines Operation To establish a three party conference call Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Current call on hold 2 Enter a trunk access code or dial the number of the exten Outside dial tone if trunk access code sion you wish to add to the call entered 3 If you entered a trunk access code in step 2 dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call Otherwise proceed to step 4 4 Press the CONF key when your call is answered Connected to party 5 To add another party repeat steps 1 4 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI I System Timers Trunk to Trunk Co
275. o enter a space 8 Repeat steps 6 7 as many times as necessary to enter the desired PSD name Note Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry 9 Press the HOLD key when finished Next PSD bin number displays 10 Toenter another speed dial name repeat steps 5 9 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 185 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation SSD Names To set SSD names using a large display or small display phone Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Press the PROG key Press the key Bm mi Enter 1 for the SSD Name Assignment mode SSD NO gt SSD NAME displays A Enter the speed dial bin number 00 79 or 000 799 Press the HOLD key SSDXXX A B C D E F XXX displays where XXX specified SSD bin number Press the FLASH key to clear the current data A B C D E F XXX displays where XXX specified SSD bin number Enter the speed dial name If using alarge display phone press the soft key next to the desired row of letters See Example 1 on page 186 If using a small display phone press the appropriate one touch key See Example 2 on page 188 Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter See Example 1 Large display phone on page 186 See Example 2 Small display phone on page 188 Notes Press the key to erase a single entry Press the
276. old Answer feature access code default 9 2 Enter the Floating Hold orbit number 001 576 for the held call Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 01 Floating Hold HOLD Key e FFI 2 Dial Plan Exclusive Hold With Exclusive Hold only the extension that held the call can retrieve it Exclusive Hold can be used to hold CO calls and extension calls Operation To place a call on Exclusive Hold Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Hold Key Operation System vs Exclusive e FF3 0 Extension COS Assignment Considerations e Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive when placed on hold by pressing the HOLD key 216 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Broker s Hold Broker s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by pressing the HOLD key Operation To place a call on Broker s Hold Action Result 1 Pick up the first call 2 Press the HOLD key First call on hold 3 Pick up the second call 4 Press the HOLD key Second call on hold first call retrieved Hardware Requirements e N A Rel
277. on number that is dialed after pressing VM TRF 72 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Chapter 4 User Maintenance This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the following System maintenance topics and features Topic Page Introduction 74 About User Programming 74 Set System Date Time Day 75 Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers 76 Set Personal Speed Dial Names 77 Set System Speed Dial Numbers 82 Set System Speed Dial Names 83 Set System Speed Dial Index 84 Set Extension Names 86 Set Verified Account Codes 87 Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail 89 Set Message Key ID Code 90 Set Mode Schedule 91 Set Special Day Mode 93 Set Exception Day Mode 99 Set Day of Week Mode 101 Set Walking TRS Codes 103 Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension 104 Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension 105 Set Caller ID Logging Extensions 106 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 73 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation Introduction User Maintenance provides several items that can be adjusted by the end user of the telephone system The telephone system dealer is not required to make these changes These items include settings for Date and Time including date time and day of week Personal Speed Dial PSD Assignment including PSD number and name System Speed Dial SSD Assignment including SSD number and name Extensio
278. onitor ON speaker Several held calls Latest held call will be transferred phone returns to idle sta or Headset Mode tus Monitor OFF No held calls Current call talk will be released phone returns to idle sta tus Monitor OFF Handset Off Hook Several held calls Latest held call will be transferred phone gets internal dial tone No held calls Current call talk will be released phone gets internal dial tone Table 13 Feature access codes for FF key assignments Feature Description CO Trunk Key Fixed Feature Code additional digits to program into key Trunk 1 576 Default Flexible Feature Code if not listed must use Fixed Feature Code MCO Key 1 Auto Select Pattern 1 5 MCO Incoming Grp 00 99 Virtual Port Key 9 Virtual Port 001 576 BLF DSS Outgoing 9 Extension 0 9999 BLF DSS Immediate Ring 81 Extension 0 9999 BLF Delayed Ring 82 Extension 0 9999 154 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Feature Description BLF DSS No Ring Fixed Feature Code additional digits to program into key 834 Extension 0 9999 Default Flexible Feature Code if not listed must use Fixed Feature Code 2 Way Box for Cabinet 1 61 box no 2 Way Box for Cabinet 2 62 box no 2 Way Box for Cabinet 3 63 box n
279. orwarding must already be programed into speed dialing For instructions see Speed Dialing on page 276 5 Replace the handset To cancel Call Forwarding All Calls Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 731 For another extension enter 751 If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension enter the extension number Replace the handset Call Forwarding Busy When Call Forwarding Busy is set all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded 256 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features To set Call Forwarding Busy Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 722 For another extension enter 742 3 If setting Call Forwarding for another extension dial the number of the extension whose calls you want to forward 4 Enter the destination number If forwarding to another extension dial the extension number If forwarding to an outside number press the key then enter the SSD bin number Note Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programed into speed dialing For instructions see Speed Dialing on page 276 5 Replace the handset To cancel C
280. ote Variable Mode features required system programming Changing the Display Contrast You can adjust the display contrast by pressing the VOLUME A or key while the phone is idle 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 147 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Do Not Disturb CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do Not Disturb DND feature When DND is activated calls to that extension receive busy tone You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension Operation To set DND for your own extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the DND Set Cancel code default 720 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 148 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To cancel DND for your own extension Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the DND Set Cancel code default 720 DND CD LED light goes off DND Cleared displays 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To set DND for another extension Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the DND Set by
281. ouse phones extension and 911 emergency calling only Trunks 1 24 are in trunk group 1 and are to the local CO for local calls In addition long distance carriers are accessed using these trunks by dialing the equal access codes Long distance carrier A equal access code 101X XXX is the least expensive carrier during the weekday times of 8 to 6 Long distance carrier B is the least expensive long distance carrier during nights weekends and holidays Trunks 25 and 26 are in trunk group 2 and are Out WATS trunks from Long Distance Carrier C These trunks are less expensive than either long distance carrier lines regardless of the WATS band Trunks 27 and 28 are Foreign Exchange lines to a central office exchange in Birmingham where a sister store and several suppliers are located These trunks are always preferred for any call to the Birmingham area code of 205 with exchanges 555 556 and 557 310 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Figure A 9 Example System Configuration 101XXXX Long Distance Carrier A less expensive from Legacy PBX 8 to 6 Trunks 1 24 101YYYY 75 Retail Floor Ext PE expensive nights 40 General Office Ext and weekends Out WATS 10 Buyer Ext Trunks 25 26 least expensive 25 Executive Ext long distance 2 Attendant Group Ext Foreign Exchange Trunks 27 28 7 Warehouse Ext least expensive to Birmingham
282. outes and then the current route for an available trunk for the Queuing time period When ARS is active the dialed digits can be analyzed to determine if the call is toll restricted and what type of routing the call will follow Leading Digits Table The leading digits table considers the initial dialed digits in determining the restriction TRS level and ARS routing Up to 10 digits can be considered The digits may be any number 0 1 9 In addition a wild card may be used to occupy any digit position For instance 11 would consider the numbers 011 111 211 311 411 511 611 711 811 911 When considering the prefix string the system considers the longest exact match first For instance the prefix string 404 match would be followed before 40 A wild card is always considered last For instance if 911 were dialed and both 911 and 11 were prefix strings the 911 would be followed If additional digits need to be considered a prefix ID can be used to cross reference the Analyze Digits Table Once the system determines an exact match the system will determine from this table the number of digits that are expected to be dialed and the restriction TRS level If the TRS level allows the call to proceed then the route type and its associated pattern number entry index number are followed There are three possible route types the Route Table the Route List Table and the Time List Table Analyze Digits Table If the Leading
283. party 5 To drop out of the conference call hang up 6 To release a conference member press PROG 1 to release conference member 1 or press PROG 2 to release confer ence member 2 Note The conference member numbers are shown on the display Hardware Requirements e N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 143 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Related Programming e FFI1 1 System Timers Trunk to Trunk Considerations N A Eight Party Conferencing With the optional Conference Card installed up to 8 parties can be included in a conference call However only one of the parties can be a CO line i e 8 extensions or 7 extensions and 1 CO line Operation To establish an eight party conference call from the idle status Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Eight Party Conference code default 788 Go to step 4 3 Press the HOLD key 4 Dial the number of the extension you wish to add to the call Note One outside party can be included 5 If you accessed an outside line in step 4 dial the number of Dialed number displays the party you wish to add to the call Otherwise proceed to step 6 6 Press the CONF key when your call is answered Connected to the called party 7 To add additional parties to the call repeat steps 3 6 To establish an eight p
284. party Voice Mail See Voice Mail Integration Third Party on page 68 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 233 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Onhook Dialing CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Onhook Dialing allows users to dial without lifting the handset However the Digital Single Line Telephone DSLT does not have a microphone so you must lift the handset to talk Operation To use onhook dialing Action Result 1 Press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter a trunk access code or dial an extension number 3 If you entered a trunk access code in step 2 dial the phone number Otherwise proceed to step 4 4 When the call is answered lift the handset to talk Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Offhook Signaling CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Offhook Signaling sends a tone to a busy extension to indicate that another CO call has arrived or a call is camped on Operation After receiving an offhook signal during a call Action Result 1 Press the HOLD key 2 Press the flashing FF key for the CO line of the incoming call 234 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Note For details about handling multiple calls see Call Hold on page 214 Hardware Re
285. party hears alert tone from the speaker Calling party hears ringback tone 3 Remain on the line until the called party answers 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 141 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation To use Manual Camp on Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Dial the extension number Busy tone Enter the Camp on Call Waiting code default 2 Wait XXX displays where XXX extension number name Called party hears alert tone from the speaker Calling party hears ringback tone Remain on the line until the called party answers To answer a Camp on Call Waiting signal Action Result Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key again to be con nected to the waiting call OR Press the HOLD key Current call placed on hold Connected to waiting call Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF1 0 03 Extension COS Manual Camp on Send FF1 0 03 Extension COS Manual Camp on Receive FF1 2 Dial Plan FF3 Extension COS FF3 0 Auto Camp on Considerations You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp on See To camp a call onto a busy extension on page 135 142 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapte
286. play Number Start Stop AUTO 2 ndicates that the digits that follow are either a feature access code or an extension number Not needed if your System is set for Intercom Level See Note below ndicates that the digits that follow are for an outside number and the System should seize the next available trunk when dialing Not needed if your System is set for CO Level See Note below ndicates that the enclosed digits should not be displayed during dialing Must precede and follow the digits that you do not want displayed Example AUTO 2 555 4143 AUTO 2 Note The System has two levels CO Level and Intercom Level If set at CO Level default you must enter the code for Intercom Level when programming a feature access code or extension number for speed dialing If the System is set at Intercom Level you must enter the MCO Code when programming an outside number for speed dialing System Speed Dial You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be programmed depending on how the System is configured In an 80 SSD number system the SSD numbers are stored in bins 00 79 In 800 SSD number systems the SSD numbers are stored in bins 000 799 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 181 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Operation To assign SSD numbers Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press
287. plays 13 To set additional SSD names press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired SSD Desired SSD bin number displays 14 Repeat steps 9 13 until all SSD names are entered 15 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode Enter SSD displays 16 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key 81 OR User MAINT displays To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF OR key ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Set System Speed Dial Index Description For a description of System Speed Dial SSD see System Speed Dial on page 181 for a Digital Key Telephone System Speed Dial on page 240 for a Digital Single Line Telephone DSLT and System Speed Dial on page 283 for a Single Line Telephone SLT Operation To set SSD index using either a large display or small display phone Action Result 1 Ifnot already in User Maintenance mode enter User Main tenance mode See To enter User Maintenance mode on page 75 81 User MAINT displays 2 At the 81 level enter 02 3 Press the HOLD key 8102 SSD Assignment displays 4 Enter 2 84 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 4 User Maintenance Action Result Press the HOLD key 2 SSD Index displays
288. quirements e N A Related Programming e CO Off Hook Signal Considerations The CO call type may be either multiple ring direct or camp on e system does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions During a conference call During an OHVA or Busy override Data Privacy is enabled thereceiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail oice Announce All Versions Description You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call and then use the Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA feature to make an announcement that only the called party can hear You can also transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the announcement using this feature Operation To make an OHVA Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Dial the extension number Busy signal Enter the OHVA feeature access code default 8 zx oar Lp s Make your announcement To transfer a call using OHVA Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Current call on hold 2 Dialthe extension number to which the call is being trans Busy signal ferred 3 Enter OHVA feature access code default 8 and announce the call to be transferred 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 235 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Action Result 4 If transfer is not accepted press the FLASH key Transfe
289. r such as adding an area code or equal access number and digits can be added to the end of a number IRS Configuration and Operation This section provides the following An overview of the TRS operation example TRS configuration This is a simple example intended to introduce TRS planning and implementation Example worksheets are included e Worksheets for planning and implementing a TRS plan 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 295 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation TRS Programming Operation Overview The purpose of TRS is to restrict outside call origination based on the number dialed and the originator As shown in Figure A 4 TRS Operation Non ARS at the end of this appendix up to 50 TRS Classes settings are assigned When a call is originated several general settings for the originator are always considered Digit Restriction This is the maximum number of digits that can be dialed Incoming Dialing Restriction If this is enabled an outside call cannot be originated during an incoming call Outgoing SSD Dialing Restriction This determines if SSD dialing is allowed or not Star and Pound f Dialing Restriction This determines if the and digits can be outdialed When a call is originated the system determines the TRS class for the originator from either the Trunk Class Assignments or the Extension Class Assignments It then determines the originator
290. r 05 3 Press the HOLD key 8105 C FWD ID Code displays 4 Press the HOLD key CF ID EXT Numbe displays 5 Dial the extension number 6 Press the HOLD key CF ID EXT XXX displays where XXX extension number 7 Enter the Call Forward ID code Notes The ID code may contain up to 16 digits and contain 0 1 9 pause REDIAL key To clear an entry or any existing data press the FLASH key 8 Press the HOLD key to store the entry Next extension number displays 9 To set additional Call Forward ID codes press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired extension Desired extension displays 10 Repeat steps 7 9 until all Call Forward ID codes are set 11 Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode CF ID EXT Numbe displays 12 To return to the top menu level 81 press the PROG key OR To exit the User Maintenance mode press the ON OFF key 81 User MAINT displays OR ON OFF LED goes off Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 89 Chapter 4 User Maintenance Section 700 Operation N A Considerations N A Set Message Key ID Code Description For a description of the Message Key ID Code Feature see Message Key ID Code on page 70 On a large display phone you can use a Message key to either retrieve voice mail messages or respond to te
291. r 5 Key Telephone Features Conference Calls CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation With the standard system configuration up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time If the optional Conference Card is installed up to 8 parties can participate in a conference call The System supports the following types of Conference Calls e Three Party Conferencing e Eight Party Conferencing Three Party Conferencing The System supports the following types of three party conference calls 3 extensions 2 extensions and 1 CO line 1 extension and 2 CO lines Operation To establish a 3 party conference call Action Result 1 While on call press the HOLD key or the line key of your Extension number outside line number current call or name of held party displays 2 Press a vacant CO key enter a trunk access code or dial the Outside dial tone if trunk access code number of the extension you wish to add to the call entered CO displays where XXX line number 3 If you pressed an unlit line key in step 2 dial the number of Dialed number displays the party you wish to add to the call Otherwise proceed to step 4 4 Press the CONF key when your call is answered CNF1 CO XXX or EXT XXX and CNF2 CO YYY or EXT YYY displays where XXX first party and Y Y Y sec ond
292. r canceled 5 Replace the handset Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF1 0 03 System Extension COS OHVA Originate FF1 0 03 System Extension COS OHVA Receive FF3 Extension Extension COS Assignments FF4 FF Key Assignments Considerations If Onhook Transfer is enabled the held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the OHVA hangs up If the transferred call is not answered immediately it will queue for a set time limit then return to the extension sending the OHVA by Transfer Recall Timer You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA If you make an OHVA to an SLT the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement Paging CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements Internal pages are made via the System s key telephone speakers External pages are made through the speakers of an external paging system connected to the System Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet Me Answer feature Operation To make a page Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the Group Paging code default Enter the number of the desired paging group 0 9 Make your announcement C by Cep 5 ops Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 236 DBS 576 U
293. r that begins with 0 The remaining digits are analyzed in the Analyze Digits Table From Table 7 Example User Needs Worksheet on page 314 and Table 9 Example Origination TRS Level Plan on page 316 the restriction levels are determined for each type of dialed call We determine the Route Type depending on the type of call If the time and or day impacts the cost then the time list is used If the time is not a factor but multiple trunk groups could be used then the Route List is used If a specific trunk should be used then we directly reference the Route Table Table A 12 Example Leading Digits Worksheet Prefix Dial up to 10 digits Pattern Number 1 100 Prefix ID Restriction Route Pattern Go to this Number of TRS Level Route Type Number i i i iginati Route Table 0 Prefix ID in Followin Any Origination i TRS at this levelor Route List 1 Rovte Table 1 200 below will be Time List 2 Tables restricted Route List 1 100 or Time List 1 50 Analyze Digits Digits N A N A N A N A 10 N A N A 01 N A N A 0 N A N A N A Route Table 0 Route Table 0 Route Table 0 Route Table 0 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 319 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation Table A 13 Example Analyze Digits Worksheet Pattern Number 1
294. r the SSD bin number Note Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programed into speed dialing For instructions see Speed Dialing on page 238 5 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To cancel Call Forwarding All Calls Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 731 For another extension enter 751 3 If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension dial the extension number 4 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Call Forwarding Busy When Call Forwarding Busy is set all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 211 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Operation To set Call Forwarding Busy Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 722 For another extension enter 742 3 If setting Call Forwarding for another extension dial the number of the extension whose calls you want to forward 4 Enter the destination number If forwarding to another extension dial the extension number If forwarding to an outside number press the key then enter the SSD bin number Note Any outside numbe
295. r used for Call Forwarding must already be programed into speed dialing For instructions see Speed Dialing on page 238 5 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To cancel Call Forwarding Busy Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 732 For another extension enter 752 Supe vog E If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension dial the extension number 6 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Call Forwarding No Answer When Call Forwarding No Answer is set a call will ring until the Call Forward No Answer timer expires When the timer expires the unanswered call is forwarded 212 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Operation To set Call Forwarding No Answer Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 723 For another extension enter 743 3 If setting Call Forwarding for another extension dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward 4 Dialthe destination number If forwarding to another extension dial the extension number If forwarding to an outside number press the key then enter the SSD b
296. ramming FF4 FF Key Programming FF Key Assignments e FF1 0 24 Voice Mail Transfer ID Code Considerations The VM TRF key can be assigned to any key phone DSS 72 EM 24 The VM TRF key cannot be assigned to a one touch key The VM TRF key can be used to transfer intercom as well as CO calls to a voice mailbox Voice Mail Transfer ID codes are assigned in the Maintenance Programming section Up to ten digits can be stored system responds to key operations during the transfer in the following ways Pressing the FLASH key cancels the VM TRF and returns intercom dial tone to the user When the VM TRF is cancelled the incoming call is still connected but is on hold e Ifa valid key CO key or second DSS key for example is pressed the VM TRF is cancelled and the operation invoked by the key is performed Ifan invalid key REDIAL for example is pressed the VM TRF is cancelled and the user receives busy tone e Once VM TRF is pressed the user can dial up to 10 digits before completing the transfer e Ifa user begins to perform the voice mail transfer and the extension cannot hold a call one call is already on non appearance hold for example the system will keep the call in the talk state and will not allow the voice mail transfer to be initiated If the VM TRF key stores a number other than a voice mail extension number the system does not send DSS BLF information or the extensi
297. ration To assign a DSS BLF key Action Result 1 Press the PROG key 2 Press the FF key to be assigned the DSS BLF appearance 3 Press the Redial key 4 Enter the code for the desired DSS BLF mode as follows 9 Ext ft DSS Mode Only 81 Ext DSS BLF Immediate Ring 82 Ext DSS BLF Delayed Ring 83 Ext DSS BLF No Ring 5 Press the HOLD key To make an intercom call using the DSS BLF key Action Result 1 Press the flashing DSS BLF key To pick up a call on a DSS BLF key Action Result 1 Go off hook or press the flashing DSS BLF key Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming e FF1 0 02 BLF Call Pickup e FF4 0 04 FF Key Assignment 164 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Considerations e If several calls arrive at a DSS BLF key the calls are queued and ring on a first in first out basis e IfaBLF key has a second call while busy and off hook signaling is enabled the BLF key starts blinking The call can be answered by pressing the BLF key or going on hook and then off hook Direct Line Appearances CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Direct Line DL keys are used to originate and receive calls over specific trunk numbers DL keys can be assigned to any trunk number The LED for a DL key will flash red on an incoming call even if the CO line is set to ring If another extension answers the call the LED on the telephone
298. ries telephones For information on Key Telephone features and operation see Chapter 5 of this manual For information on the DSLT features and operation see Chapter 6 of this manual 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 43 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Analog Device Capability The System supports analog telephone devices These devices include fax machines answering machines cordless telephones computer modems as well as standard rotary and push button telephones This provides full flexibility in configuring the System Hardware Requirements Analog devices must be connected to an analog port Related Programming e N A Considerations N A DP DTMF Single Line Telephones SLTs The System supports both DP rotary dial and DTMF push button analog extension types Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations CPC card provides 4 DTMF receivers Traffic levels may require that one or more MFR DTMP circuit cards be installed Each MFR card provides 8 DTMF decoders ISDN BRI S Point Interface The System supports ISDN BRI terminal devices for connection as extensions The BRI provides 2 B bearer plus 1 D data channel support 2B D 192 kbps Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A 44 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700
299. route ARS to the originator s ARS level If the route ARS exceeds the originator s ARS the call processing will stop and the caller will receive busy tone When the call is first presented the first priority route is tried If there is no available trunk in the first route and queuing point is not enabled the system continues to the next priority route compares the ARS levels and if acceptable checks for an available trunk If no trunk is available it will continue to the next priority trunk and so forth until all routes have been attempted If an available trunk is found and warning tone is enable the system will first issue a warning tone to the caller to allow the caller the opportunity to hang up before using a more expensive trunk If the queuing point is enabled the system will wait for an available trunk beginning with the first priority trunk until the queuing point timer expires before moving to the next possible route Route Table The Route Table provides a simple trunk group selection and selects any digit dialing modification needed This table is directly referenced when there is only one route to use It is also indirectly reference from the Route List Table Digit Modify Table Once a route is selected the actual dialed digits can be changed based on the Digit Modify Table Digits can be deleted from the beginning of the number such as removing an unneeded area code digits can be added to the beginning of the numbe
300. runk Group Pickup Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code default 709 3 Complete the call and replace the handset Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FFI 2 Dial Plan e 5 3 MCO Inbound Trunk Group Members Considerations N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Trunk Direct Pickup Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number Operation To use Trunk Direct Pickup Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code default 0 Dial the number of the ringing or holding system trunk zx pee pei Complete the call and replace the handset Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 2 Dial Plan Considerations e Calls on exclusive hold cannot be picked up Call Transfer CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number The transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised You can also use the Camp on feature to transfer a call to a busy extension Supervised Transfer When completing a supervised transfer the transferring party remains on the line until the third party answers then he she announces
301. s For more information see Section 520 Built In ACD Reference Manual Automatic Route Selection Description When Automatic Route Selection ARS is enabled the system follows a preselected route for calls Usually the selected routing is the least cost route ARS works in conjunction with Toll Restriction Service TRS Calls can be denied based on the programmed TRS level for the originating party For more information see Ringing Modes on page 59 e Three levels of ARS checking are available based on the dialed number following the ARS access code Direct Route Selection The simplest form of ARS routing that upon ARS entry enter 9 directly selects the trunk group and any dialed number modification e Route List Selection A more complex routing that includes up to 5 alternative levels of route selection and includes TRS level checking e Time List Selection The most complex routing that determines the appropriate route list based upon the day and time e Forced ARS is available on an Extension Class of Service COS basis e A special day list provides tailored ARS routing for up to 20 holidays vacation days etc e Automatic modification of dialed numbers is available This includes deleting up to 24 prefix digits and adding up to a 10 digit prefix and a 10 digit suffix The modification of dialed numbers can include pauses Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF conversion itemized code extension number and an au
302. s Section 700 Operation Operation To link multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin Action Result 1 Determine the SSD bin numbers to be linked 2 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key 3 A Press the PROG key B Press the AUTO key OR A Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 4 Enter the PSD bin number 80 90 Enter Spd Dial displays 5 Press the AUTO key 6 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 000 799 that contains the first part of the number to be dialed 7 Repeat steps 5 6 up to 5 more times for all additional SSDs to be dialed 8 Press the HOLD key when finished Stored PSDXXX displays To use a PSD Key that links multiple SSDs Action Result 1 Ifnecessary select the trunk group 9 81 84 Normally the trunk is selected by the speed dial numbers 2 Press the PSD key To manually link speed dial keys together Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 If necessary access an outside line 3 If you are using a PSD number press the one touch key for the first part of the number If you are using an SSD number press the AUTO key then enter the SSD bin number 4 Use the one touch keys or press the AUTO key and enter the SSD codes to dial the parts of the phone number until it is completed Hardware Requirements e N A 184 DB
303. s e A DSU is required not available from Panasonic CO Trunk Interface ISDN PRI The System supports ISDN PRI with the VB 44540 ISDN PRI Interface unit The VB 44540 is a T S Point ISDN PRI that supports 23 B bearer channels and 1 D data channel 23B D 1544kbps This unit connects to an ISDN DSU Up to 3 units may be installed in a cabinet if you use full channel 23B D or 24 B A maximum of 18 units may be utilized in a fully equipped system When all 24 channels on a unit are utilized 3 slot positions are required Hardware Requirements e N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 35 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Related Programming e N A Considerations N A CO Trunk Interface Loop Start The VB 44510 Loop Start interface unit supplies 8 loop start analog trunks circuits In addition the VB 44511 Loop Start Ground Start interface unit may alternatively be used to connect to loop start trunks Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Computer Telephony Integration Capability Description Computer Telephony Integration CTI provides communication and coordination of operation between computers and the telephone system A System Telephony Application Programming Interface TAPI module is available to connect extensions to Microsoft windows based applications The TAPI desktop module enables the capabilities of first party ca
304. s e FFI 2 Dial Plan Considerations N A Trunk Direct Pickup Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number Operation To use Trunk Direct Pickup Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code default 0 3 Dialthe number of the ringing or holding system hold trunk 4 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 221 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Related Programming FF1 2 Dial Plan Considerations Call on exclusive hold cannot be picked up Call Transfer CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Supervised Transfer Operation To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number The transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised You can also use the Camp on feature to transfer a call to a busy extension When completing a supervised transfer the transferring party remains on the line until the third party answers then he she announces the call Action Result While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone Dial the extension number to which the call is to be trans ferred W
305. s to Are additional Leading Digits digits required for match No exact match Table Prefix Dial entries Deny call ls there a Prefix ID entry in Leading Digits Table System compares additional digit s to Analyze Digits Table Prefix Dial entries Are additional digits required for match Deny call No Match System checks Restriction TRS Level in Leading Digit or Analyze Digit Table What Route Type Pattern is entered Is Origination TRS Level greater than Restriction TRS Level Restrict call System checks originating ext or trunk TRS Class System checks class assignment for TRS level and ARS Level Origination TRS and ARS Level Time List Pattern Route List Pattern Route Pattern 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 307 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation Figure A 8 ARS TRS Flowchart Page 2 of 2 Time List Pattern ls the current day listed as a Special Day System selects Time List associated with Special Day System selects Time List associated with Day of the Week From the Time List Pattern the system determines the active time period and its associated Route List Is there an available trunk in the listed route No
306. s Worksheet Tenant Name XYZ Department Stores Tenant 1 1 72 User Type User Extension Day Calling Needs Night Calling Needs Day TRS Night TRS office or Trunk Ports Long Distance 411 Long Distance 411 Class Class executive lobby BSSC and specific number etc specific number etc 1 50 1 50 Numbers Executive 1101 1125 No Restrictions No Restrictions 1 1 Buyers 1166 1175 No Restrictions except No Restrictions except 2 2 special numbers 976 special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc collect calls etc General Office 1126 1165 Long Distance Allowed Local calls only 3 4 No special numbers 976 No special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc collect calls etc Allowed to call Birmingham Attendant Group 1176 1177 No Restriction Local calls only 1 4 No special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc Allowed to call Birmingham Retail floor 1178 1253 Local calls only Local calls only 4 4 No special numbers 976 No special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc collect calls etc Allowed to call Birmingham Allowed to call Birmingham Warehouse 1254 1260 Extension calling and Extension calling and 5 5 emergency calling only emergency calling only a After all user data has been entered
307. s in use when the reminder call is scheduled the reminder call is issued 3 minutes later Irunk Access CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside code CO Line Trunk Access Direct Trunk Access MCO Line Preference 190 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features MCO Trunk Access CO Line Key Trunk Access You can access an outside line by pressing a CO line key Operation To access an outside line Action Result 1 Press a vacant CO key Outside dial tone CO XXX displays where XXX line number 2 Dial phone number Dialed phone number displays Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming FF4 FF Key Assignment Considerations N A Direct Trunk Access Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access to test trunks or to access data trunks Operation To use Direct Trunk Access Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key 2 Enter the Direct Trunk Access code default 88 Dialed number displays 3 Enter the desired trunk number Outside dial tone CO XXX displays where XXX line number 4 Dial the phone number Dialed phone number displays Hardware Requirements N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Rev
308. s the HOLD key Cleared V M ID displays Pe Go onhook or press ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A DID DNIS DDI Voice Mail ID Code DID DNIS DDI calls may be sent directly to voice mail through the used of the DID Voice Mail ID Code A prefix and suffix may be specified to be sent to the voice mail as well as a chosen number of DID digits Either no digits default the last two digits of the DID the last three digits of the DID or the entire DID number may be sent The prefix may be up to eight digits including 0 9 and pause REDIAL The suffix may be up to eight digits including 0 9 and pause REDIAL Hardware Requirements e N A 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 69 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Related Programming FF1 4 06 DID Number Automatic Send to VM e FF1 4 06 VM ID Code Prefix FF1 4 06 VM ID Code Suffix Considerations e Each pause is a fixed 1 second delay e f you do not assign a Voice Mail ID Code the DID digits will be sent to voice mail e Only one Voice Mail ID Code is available for the system High Priority Message Waiting Message waiting displays and LEDs may be utilized by the Voice Mail system to indicate that a Voice Mail message has been left in your mail box When you retrieve the message the message waiting indications are cleared Hardware R
309. ses an originator s TRS level of 0 9 may be assigned for each possible trunk group When a call is originated on a particular trunk group this value is used to determine the originator s TRS level From the dialed digits a restriction TRS level 0 8 is determined If the originator s TRS level does not exceed the restriction TRS level the call is restricted The higher the originator s TRS level the less the restriction If the originator s TRS level is 0 no outside calls are allowed If the originator s TRS level is 9 all outside calls are allowed since this always exceeds the restriction TRS value which has a maximum value of 8 Dialing Analysis When a trunk is accessed the dialed digits can be analyzed to determine if the call will be toll restricted 292 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Leading Digits Table The leading digits table considers the initial dialed digits in determining the restriction TRS level Up to 10 digits can be considered The digits may be any number 0 1 9 In addition a wild card may be used to occupy any digit position For instance 11 would consider the numbers 011 111 211 311 411 511 611 711 811 911 When considering the prefix string the system will always consider the longest exact match first For instance the prefix string 404 match would be followed before 40 A wild card is always considered las
310. sfer Action Result While on a call hookflash to place the call on hold Intercom dial tone Enter a trunk access code Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred 23 peo ae Complete the transfer by replacing the handset 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 267 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension Operation To camp a call onto a busy extension Action Result 1 While on a call hookflash to place the call on hold Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number to which the call is to be trans ferred 3 If your extension does not have Auto Camp On activated Camp on tone heard at called extension enter the Camp On Call Waiting code default 2 4 Complete the transfer by replacing the handset Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Onhook Transfer at Ringback e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Onhook Transfer at Talk e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Onhook Transfer at Camp on Considerations e On Hook Transfer must be enabled for the transferring party s Extension Class of Service COS If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires the call will recall to the transferring extension e Ifa Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires the call will revert to the Attendant
311. sfer Allow Deny 48 OHVA Allow Deny 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 31 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Class of Service Features 49 OHVA Answer Allow Deny 50 Call Waiting Answer at HOLD Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF2 Trunk COS Extension COS Assignments Considerations N A Class of Service Trunk to Trunk Restriction Trunk to Trunk COS allows or restricts call transfers from one trunk to another trunk based on the originating and receiving trunk COS Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming e FFI1 0 04 Class of Service Trunk Tie e FFI 0 11 Trunk Trunk Restriction Considerations N A CO Ringing Types Description Several types of CO ringing are available for the System including the following Direct Inward Dialing DID Ringing e Direct In Line DIL Ringing e Direct Inward System Access DISA Ringing e Multiple Ringing These ringing types may be used in any combination in the System Direct Inward Dial Ringing DID Ringing allows calls on a common CO to be directed to ring to a specific extension or group of extensions etc based upon the final digits dialed These final digits are received from the DID trunk and compared to a DID Table that determines where the calls should ring Depending on the 32 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3
312. side number The transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised You can also use the Camp on feature to transfer a call to a busy extension Supervised Transfer When completing a supervised transfer the transferring party remains on the line until the third party answers then he she announces the call 132 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Operation To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone 2 Dialthe extension number to which the call is to be trans ferred 3 When the call is answered inform the third party of the Talk EXT Name or Number displays transfer 4 Complete the transfer f On Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS replace the handset or press the ON OFF key f On Hook Transfer is disabled press the PROG key or RELEASE key if using DSS 72 To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number Action Result 1 While on a call press the HOLD key Intercom dial tone 2 Seizea trunk line and dial the number to which the call is to be transferred 3 When the call is answered inform the third party of the Talk EXT XXX displays where XXX transfer extension 4 Complete the transfer Original call LED light turns red f On Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extensio
313. sion number Not needed if your System is set for Intercom Level See Note below ndicates that the digits that follow are for an outside number and the System should seize the next available trunk when dialing Not needed if your System is set for CO Level See Note below Note The System has two levels CO Level and Intercom Level If set at CO Level default you must enter the code for Intercom Level when programming a feature access code or extension number for speed dialing If the System is set at Intercom Level you must enter the MCO Code when programming an outside number for speed dialing System Speed Dial You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be programmed depending on how the System is configured In an 80 SSD number system the SSD numbers are stored in bins 00 79 In 800 SSD number systems the SSD numbers are stored in bins 000 799 Operation To assign SSD numbers Action Result Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 2 710 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 or 000 799 Dial the phone number Press the HOLD key Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key ev eene es bs op To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 If necess
314. sion number Busy tone 3 Enter the Busy Override code default 9 Alert tone sounds to both extensions System programming required Connection to both parties Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 01 Splash Tone Busy Override e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Manual DND Override Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Forced DND Override e FF1 2 Dial Plan e FF3 Extension COS Data Security Considerations e You cannot break in on three party conference calls e The default for the override alert tone is off If the override alert tone is enabled the tone will be sent to both parties when a call is overridden 254 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features Callback Request CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description If you dial a busy extension you can have the System call you back when that extension becomes free When you answer the System automatically rings the called party again Operation To set a Callback Request Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number Busy tone 3 Enter the Callback Request code default 3 Ringback tone 4 Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone System calls back when called extension becomes free To respond to the callback request Action Result 1 Lift the handset System automatical
315. ss the MSG key to place an automatic callback to that extension If more than one callback message has been received pressing the MSG key performs auto callback in the order received Priority Message Wait Callback One Touch Voice Mail Access You can press the MSG key to automatically access your voice mailbox The phone will dial your voice mailbox and send access codes if programmed for retrieving new messages Operation To automatically call back an extension that left a message or to access Voice Mail Action Result 1 Press the MSG key Automatically call back to extension OR Automatic access to Voice Mail Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF8 1 Voice Mail ID Code Considerations The Message lamp lights when a message has been received If more than one callback message has been received pressing the MSG key performs auto callback in the order received The MSG key works only when the phone is idle or receiving internal dial tone Auto callback is always enabled for large display phones Messages are accessed in a first in first out order for Message Wait except Priority Message Wait which is typically sent by Voice Mail Message Waiting Callback CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer you can leave a message wait indication at that extension requesting a return call 576
316. striction This determines if SSD dialing is allowed or not Star and Pound f Dialing Restriction This determines if the and digits can be outdialed When a call is originated the system determines the TRS ARS Class for the originator from either the Extension Class Assignments or the Trunk Class Assignments It then determines the originator TRS level and originator TRS level from the TRS ARS Class Assignments In addition the Queuing Point continue parameter setting is considered When the call is dialed the system collects the digits and compares the leading digits to the leading digits table entry The system looks for the longest available exact match A may be entered as a wild card for any digit position If an exact match is found the system looks to see if there is a prefix ID If so it will jump to the analyze digits table If not the system will compare the entered TRS Restriction value to the call originator s assigned TRS level If the Restriction value is equal to or greater than the originator s TRS level the call is denied Otherwise the Route Type and associated Pattern are determined and the system jumps there 306 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Figure A 7 ARS TRS Flowchart Page 1 of 2 Extension or trunk dials first MCO Code usually 9 User dials digit System compares dialed digit
317. system needs are listed in Table 7 Example User Needs Worksheet on page 314 Most of the information is straight forward The Day TRS and Night TRS Classes are determined by assigning consecutive Class numbers to each unique calling need When a duplicate need is encountered the same class number is assigned The system trunk equipment is listed in Table 8 Example MCO Tenant Trunk Groups Worksheet on page 315 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 313 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation Table A 7 Example User Needs Worksheet Tenant Name XYZ Department Stores Tenant 1 1 72 User Type User Extension Day Calling Needs Night Calling Needs Day TRS Night TRS office or Trunk Ports Long Distance 411 Long Distance 411 Class Class executive lobby BSSC and specific number etc specific number etc 1 50 1 50 Numbers Executive 1101 1125 No Restrictions No Restrictions 1 1 Buyers 1166 1175 No Restrictions except No Restrictions except 2 2 special numbers 976 special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc collect calls etc General Office 1126 1165 Long Distance Allowed Local calls only 3 4 No special numbers 976 No special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc collect calls etc Allowed to call Birmingham Att
318. t For instance if 911 were dialed and both 911 and 11 were prefix strings the 911 would be followed If additional digits need to be considered a prefix ID can be used to cross reference the Analyze Digits Table Once the system determines an exact match the system will determine from this table the number of digits that are to be dialed and the restriction TRS level There are two other entries in the Leading Digits Table Route Type and Route Number These are not used for TRS only operation Note that TRS operation is a match then restrict feature If there is no match there is no restriction Make certain that there is a match As a catch all use the wild card Note With TRS is used in a system behind another PBX the PBX access code does not have to be processed by TRS Analyze Digits Table If the Leading Digits Table contains a Prefix ID the system will consider all appearances of this Prefix ID to look for an exact match Up to 8 digits are considered in addition to the prefix dial digits Once the system determines an exact match the system determines from this table the number of digits that can are expected to be dialed and the restriction TRS level There are two other entries in the Analyze Digits Table Route Type and Route Number There are not used for TRS only operation ARS TRS Features When ARS is used in the DBS 576 system TRS also operates TRS Class Features These are the same features as for TR
319. t Number e FF5 0 02 Day 1 Attendant Hunting e FF5 0 03 Day 2 Attendant Hunting e FF5 0 03 Night Attendant Hunt e FF2 Ring Type Considerations e The System allows one attendant group for each system mode Day 1 Day 2 and Night e An attendant group can contain both real extensions and virtual extensions If virtual several phones can be made to ring at the same time e Attendant groups can use only Pilot Terminal Hunt Group or Pilot Distributed Hunt Group For more information see Hunting Groups on page 46 22 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features The pilot number for an attendant group is flexible i e any extension number can be designated as the pilot not a real extension Ifamember of the attendant group has Do Not Disturb DND or Call Forwarding All set that phone is temporarily removed from the attendant group Ifa member of the attendant group has Call Forwarding Busy set and the extension is busy the call goes to the next phone in the attendant group e Ifall members are busy for the duration of the busy queuing timer the call can be forwarded to another hunt group or another extension e Attendant groups support the following call types Direct Inward Dialing DID Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS Direct Dial Inward DDI Direct Inward System Access DISA Extension calls Private network atte
320. t extension number displays 12 To enter another extension name press the CONF key and EXT NO gt repeat steps 5 11 EXT NAME displays 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 51 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Example 1 Large display phone To enter D a Press the first soft key on the top left b Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row gt ABCDEF abcdef D e GHIJKL ghijkl e D MNOPQR STUVWX stuvwx Goo NERIS yz amp sp MSG CONF MENU PREV NEXT PROG Ji 7 JAC 0 2 a m j To enter 0 a Press the third soft key from the top right b Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row Co ABCDEF abcdef GHIJKL ghijkl C C MNOPQR mnopqgr cC C STUVWX stuvwx CoO C ye Nm Vs yz amp sp xad EC MSG CONF MENU PREV NEXT PROG C 3 X 2 J J 26 a e a a 52 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Example 2 Small display phone Chapter 3 System Features Refer to the following diagram to determine which one touch key to press See step 7 8 above abcdef C ghijkl D mnopar Cstuvwx Cy
321. t system 1 to 24 MCO tenant groups e 288 port system 1 to 36 MCO tenant groups e 384 port system 1 to 48 MCO tenant groups e 480 port system 1 to 60 MCO tenant groups e 576 port system 1 to 72 MCO tenant groups Hardware Hequirements e N A Related Programming e FFI 3 Incoming Outgoing e FF5 2 MCO Outgoing Trunk Assignments e 5 3 MCO Incoming Trunk Assignments e FF2 Trunk Tenant Group Assignments Extension Tenant Group Assignments Considerations When you first assign a trunk to a Trunk Tenant Group from the initial setting of 0 the system automatically assigns the trunks as a member of the same number MCO Trunk Group FF5 2 and FF5 3 For instance if Trunk 10 is assigned as a member of Trunk Tenant Group 1 then Trunk 10 is automatically assigned as a member of MCO Outbound Trunk Group 1 and MCO Inbound Trunk Group 1 These assignments can be manually changed if desired Memory Backup Description Data stored in the CPC card can be copied to another CPC card in the OP2 card slot for the first cabinet This is particularly useful when performed after completion of initial system setup as a recovery measure or before major changes are made to system configuration This backup CPC can then be used to immediately restore system operation This feature is a maintenance feature to be performed by the System certified dealer only Hardware Hequirements e seco
322. ter ON OFF PROG ON OFF to select the menu as the idle menu Small Display Phone Figure 4 Small Display Menu shown in default idle condition DIGITAL MODE END Mode key gt D 08 24 Tue JAN 14 co End key soft key 173 Sandy soft key The Mode key and End key on a small display phone allow you to change the software mode of the display from Default 1 time and date mode to Directory mode While in Directory mode you can view SSD and PSD Directories and Extension Directories You can dial a speed dial number or extension by pressing the soft key next to the desired number You can also use the soft keys to execute programmed system featues while in the Variable mode Notes The MODE key allows you to switch the display from Default to Directory mode The END key allows you to return the display to Default mode e The soft keys allow you to view speed dial and extension directories and to dial a speed dial number or extension while in the Directory mode e Speed dial numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial directory For information on programming speed dial numbers see Speed Dialing on page 179 Variable Mode Variable Mode allows you to use the soft keys to access programmed features while your phone is in the following states e During an intercom call e During CO dial tone e During a trunk call e After dialing a busy extension N
323. the REDIAL key while receiving busy tone on an outside call the System automatically redials the number The System continues to redial the number at set intervals until the called number answers the caller hangs up or the maximum of 15 redial attempts is made Operation To use Auto Repeat Dial Action Result 1 Press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter a trunk access code 3 Dial the phone number Busy tone 4 Press the REDIAL key System automatically redials number Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Auto Repeat Dial Extension COS Assignment Considerations N A Background Music CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description If your System is set up to provide Background Music music can be played from the speakers of idle telephones If a call is made to an extension receiving Background Music the music stops and the phone rings Background Music is also interrupted when the phone goes offhook The System can also provide Music on Hold MOH using a separate music source If MOH is provided callers automatically hear music when they are placed on hold For more information on MOH see page 50 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 207 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation Operation To turn Background Music on Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom
324. the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 721 For another extension enter 741 3 If setting Call Forwarding for another extension dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward 4 Enter the destination number If forwarding to another extension dial the extension number If forwarding to an outside number press the key then enter the SSD bin number Note Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programed into speed dialing For information see Speed Dialing on page 179 5 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 120 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features To cancel Call Forwarding All Calls Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 731 For another extension enter 751 3 If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension dial the extension number 4 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Call Forwarding Busy When Call Forwarding Busy is set all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded Operation To set Call Forwarding Busy Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code
325. the call Operation To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension Action Result 1 While on a call hookflash to place the call on hold Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number to which the call is to be trans ferred 266 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features Action Result 3 When the call is answered inform the third party of the transfer 4 Complete the transfer by replacing the handset To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number Action Result While on a call hookflash to place the call on hold Intercom dial tone Enter a trunk access code Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred a When the call is answered inform the third party of the transfer 5 Complete the transfer by replacing the handset Unsupervised Transfer When completing an unsupervised transfer the transferring party hangs up before the third party answers Operation To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer Action Result 1 While on a call hookflash to place the call on hold Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number to which the call is to be trans ferred 3 Complete the transfer by replacing the handset To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the tran
326. the handset Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A 282 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features Considerations Storing a new number erases any previously stored data Speed Dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters Single Line Telephone SLT can only enter 0 1 9 and If a pause MCO code intercom level Dial Pulse DP Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF code or SSD code needs to be programmed use User Maintenance to program the speed dial System Speed Dial You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be programmed depending on how the System is configured In an 80 SSD number system the SSD numbers are stored in bins 00 79 In 800 SSD number systems the SSD numbers are stored in bins 000 799 Operation To assign SSD numbers Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone Enter the Speed Dial Set Clear code default 710 Enter the SSD bin number 00 79 000 799 Dial the phone number Press the key ev oe p ops ope ESA Replace the handset To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone If necessary access an outside line Outside dial tone Enter the Speed Dial Originate code default 80 Enter the SSD
327. the handset System automatically redials extension Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Callback Request Send e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Callback Request Receive e Extension COS Considerations N A Call Forwarding CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension to an outside line or to Voice Mail Call Forwarding can be set or canceled under the following conditions from either your own extension or from an alternate extension e Call Forwarding All Calls e Call Forwarding Busy e Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding All Calls When Call Forwarding All Calls is set all incoming calls to an extension are immediately forwarded 210 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 6 DSLT Features Operation To set Call Forwarding All Calls Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 721 For another extension enter 741 3 If setting Call Forwarding for another extension dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward 4 Enter the destination number If forwarding to another extension dial the extension number If forwarding to an outside number press the key then ente
328. then assign class numbers 300 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Table A 2 Example MCO Tenant Trunk Groups Worksheet Tenant Name _ XYZ Department Stores Tenant Number _ 1 Trunk Group Description Trunks in Trunk Group Number BSSC Usage MCO Dial 9 Number 0 99 Two Way CO LS Tie Line FX MCO2 dial 81 Direct etc Access Only etc 1 Two Way CO Loop Start 1 24 MCO 1 Dial 9 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 301 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation 2 From the User Needs and Tenant Trunk Groups Worksheets TRS levels are determined This list is created by reviewing the different calling needs and assigning the most restrictions to the lowest TRS level and working up to the least restriction level Table A 3 Example Origination TRS Level Plan Originator TRS Level Properties TRS Level 9 No Restriction All long distance calls allowed except special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc Allow 911 North America long distance calls allowed except special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc Allow 911 Local Calls Allowed No long distance or special numbers 976 1900 411 operator access collect calls etc Allow calls to 205 555 XXXX 205 556
329. thorization code Itemized code and authorization are not used in some areas e Upto 8 authorization codes are available e For more information on ARS TRS see Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation on page 291 Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming N A Considerations N A 24 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 3 System Features Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Description The System can be set to automatically transfer trunk calls out to another trunk without requiring the call to be answered internally This transfer may be either trunk based or extension based 1 call forward outside Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Background Music MOH Separation Description Separate inputs are provided for Background Music and Music on Hold MOH This allows one music or sound source to be used for background music and another music or sound source to be used for music on hold A typical advantage of this is playing a pre recorded promotional tape to held parties since many may be customers while providing a selected background music for use in the office Hardware Requirements e Background music requires an SCC card VB 44181 Both Background Music and Music on Hold if using external MOH require a sound source Related Programming e N A Considerations N A Battery Backup Description Wh
330. tination 105 Extension Calling 57 Extension Direct Pickup DSLT 220 Key Telephone 131 SLT 264 Extension Feature COS 30 Extension Group Pickup All Calls DSLT 219 Key Telephone 129 SLT 263 DSLT 219 External Calls DSLT 219 Key Telephone 129 SLT 263 Key Telephone 129 SLT 263 Specified Group Pickup DSLT 219 Key Telephone 129 SLT 263 Extension Inferface Analog Device Capability 44 DP DTMF Single Line Telephones SLTs 44 Extension Interface 43 Digital Key Telephones 43 ISDN BRI S Point Interface 44 ISDN PRI S Point Interface 45 Extension Name Assignments 51 Extension Names Setting 86 Extension Restriction COS 30 F Facilities Network 56 Feature Access Codes FF Key Assignment 154 FF Key Assignment Feature Access Codes 154 FF Key Extender DSS 72 150 EM 24 151 FF Keys 152 Flash Send SLT 274 Flash Signal 328 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Index DSLT 230 Key Telephone 151 Flexible Function Keys 152 Flexible Numbering Plan 45 Floating Hold DSLT 215 Key Telephone 125 SLT 260 Virtual 67 Forwarding All Calls DSLT 210 Key Telephone 120 SLT 256 Busy DSLT 211 Key Telephone 121 SLT 258 Do Not Disturb DSLT 213 Key Telephone 123 SLT 258 DSLT 210 Key Telephone 120 No Answer DSLT 211 Key Telephone 122 SLT 257 SLT 255 Free Slot 46 H Handset Mute Function 169 Handsfree Answerback Key Telephone 158 Operation Key Telephone 158 Handsfree Answerback Key
331. tion After receiving an offhook signal during a call Action Result 1 Complete the first call and place the handset on hook 2 After the telephone rings go off hook 276 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e CO Off Hook Signal e FFI I Off Hook Signal Timer Considerations The CO call type may be either multiple ring direct camp on e Offhook signaling is not supported for an ISDN terminal System does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions During a conference call During an OHVA or Busy override Data Privacy is enabled Receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 277 Chapter 7 SLT Features Section 700 Operation oice Announce All Versions Description You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call and then use the Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA feature to make an announcement Operation To make an OHVA Action Result Lift the handset Dial the extension number Busy signal Enter the OHVA feature access code default 8 zo teo bbs oes Make your announcement Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 003 System Extension COS OHVA Originate e FF10 093 System Extension COS OHVA R
332. to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to For example if extension 221 is forwarded to extension 225 calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to extension 225 Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer If a call is unsupervised transferred to a busy extension the call will camp on to the busy extension To transfer to a outside party it is best to use supervised transfer If the trunk to trunk on hook transfer restriction is enabled a blind transfer will result in the loss of the second call but the second call will be kept on hold If not enabled and the second outside party is busy the transferred party will receive busy Camp On Call Waiting CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description If you dial a busy extension you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the called party The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be automatically connected to the new call The called party can also press the HOLD key to place the first call on hold and then answer the waiting call The System provides two types of call waiting Automatic Call Waiting You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal to the busy extension You need only to remain on the line Manual Call Waiting You must enter a code to s
333. to anyone with a COS that allows access to User Maintenance features See Chapter 4 User Maintenance of this document ime eminaer ca CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 189 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Operation To set the Timed Reminder Call feature Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Timed Reminder Set code default 31 Enter Alarm hhmm displays 3 Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound Enter the time in 24 hour format For example 0100 for 1 AM 1300 for 1 PM 4 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Alarm HH MM displays where HH hour and MM minutes To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code default 39 3 Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Time display disappears Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations alarm tone default 16 seconds will be issued at the specified time e Anextension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time To change the Reminder Call simply enter a new time If the extension i
334. to start with a selected portion of the hunting group based on the directed number However all members are eventually searched Next Extension Hunt Group Next Extension Hunt Group lets you specify which extension or hunt group to search after the Queuing Timer expires This hunt group can be set as any type of hunt group an attendant group or an extension including virtual extensions Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF5 I Hunt Groups Mode e FF5 1 Pilot Number e 5 1 Member e FF5 I Delayed Hunt Timer e FF5 I Queuing Timer e FF5 I Next Hunting 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 47 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation Considerations If amember of the hunt group has Do Not Disturb DND or Call Forwarding All set that phone is temporarily removed from the hunt group e If amember of the hunt group has Call Forwarding Busy set and the extension is busy the call goes to the next phone in the hunt group e Ifall members are busy for the duration of the busy queuing timer the call can be forwarded to another hunt group or another extension e A hunt group can contain both real extensions and virtual extensions If virtual several phones can be made to ring at the same time The pilot number for a hunt group is flexible i e any extension number can be designated as the pilot not a real extension e Hunt groups support the following call types
335. ts as the first extension Ringing Line Preference CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description Ringing Line Preference enables an extension to answer a ringing call by simply picking up the handset or pressing the ON OFF key Operation To answer a call using Ringing Line Preference Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming Extensions Ringing Line Preference by Handset e Ringing Line Preference ON OFF 178 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Considerations e If disabled in Extension Programming you must press the line key or enter the feature code for incoming pick up in order to answer a call Speed Dialing CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description The System supports the following speed dial features e Personal Speed Dial PSD e System Speed Dial SSD e Speed Dial Linking e Speed Dial Name Assignment Personal Speed Dial You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored in PSD bins numbered 80 99 You can assign up to 10 PSD numbers to the one touch keys on a non display or small display phone and up to 20 PSD numbers to the soft keys on a large display phone Once the PSD numbers have been assigned you dial them by pressing the appropriate key
336. types of Extension Group Pickup are available e Call Pickup All Calls You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension group e Call Pickup External Calls You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own extension group e Specified Group Pickup You can pick up call ringing to an extension in another extension group Operation To use Extension Group Pickup All Calls Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Extension Group Pickup All Calls code default 701 3 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key To use Extension Group Pickup External Calls Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Extension Group Pickup External Calls code default 702 3 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 219 Chapter 6 DSLT Features Section 700 Operation To use Specified Group Pickup Action Result 1 Lift the handset or press the ON OFF key Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the Specified Group Pickup code default 703 3 Enter the number of the call pickup group 01 72 where the call is ringing 4 Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements e N A
337. ult 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code For your extension enter 733 For another extension enter 753 3 If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension dial the extension number 4 Replace the handset Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb The System allows you to cancel both Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb DND for your own extension in one step To cancel Call Forwarding and DND Action Result 1 Lift the handset Intercom dial tone 2 Enter the CF DND Clear code default 7 3 Replace the handset Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward All Calls e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward Busy 258 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward No Answer FF1 0 03 Extension COS Call Forward Other FF1 2 Dial Plan FF3 0 Extension COS Assignment Considerations Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding or DND activated For example extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded Call Forwarding Busy and Call Forwarding No Answer can both be set at the same time You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 An auto camp on to a busy extension will forward to the C
338. ures Section 700 Operation Irunk Access CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Version 1 0 Description The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside call Direct Trunk Access MCO Trunk Access Direct Trunk Access Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access to test trunks or to access data trunks Operation To use Direct Trunk Access Action Result Lift the handset Enter the Direct Trunk Access code default 88 Enter the desired trunk number Outside dial tone Es Dial the phone number Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF1 0 03 Extension COS Direct Trunk Access e Extension COS Considerations N A MCO Trunk Access The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group You can seize an idle trunk from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code 286 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Chapter 7 SLT Features Operation To seize an idle trunk Action Result Lift the handset Intercom dial tone Enter the desired trunk access number 9 or 81 84 See Outside dial tone Table 16 on page 287 Dial the phone number Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF1 MCO Access 5 2 MCO Trunk Group Outbound FF7 ARS TRS Consideratio
339. will light solid red Operation Operation Action To originate a trunk call Press an idle DL key The key blinks green as the call is made Press the DL key Press the HOLD key Press the HOLD key Dial the destination extension Press the PROG key To place a call on Exclusive Trunk Hold page 133 To place a call on System Trunk Hold page 133 To transfer a call WN Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e FF4 Key Assignment Considerations N A Multi CO MCO Appearances CPC 96 CPC 288 and CPC 576 Versions Description You can make and receive CO line calls using a Multi CO MCO key Each extension can have up to 5 MCO keys An MCO key can be assigned to any of the pooled trunk groups Pressing the MCO key is the same as dialing the MCO Access Code usually 9 81 84 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 165 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Operation Operation Action To originate a trunk call Press an idle MCO key The key blinks green as the call is made To receive a call on an MCO key If ringing line preference is enabled go off hook If ringing line preference is not enabled go off hook and press the MCO key with the green flashing LED The LED lights solid green To place call on Exclusive Trunk Hold Press the MCO key The key flashes gr
340. ws up to 50 patterns to be entered Each pattern can specify up to 5 route list patterns to used based on the current time of day Up to four time list tables may be used The referenced time list table is determined by the Special Day Table or the Day of Week Table This is useful when rates change for certain days such as weekend rates versus weekday rates Example ARS Configuration As an example of setting up ARS assume that Atlanta based XYZ Department Store is using the DBS 576 PBX Situation This example installation has the following considerations 75 retail floor store phones restricted to local telephone use only except for 1800 1888 and calls to Birmingham Alabama where a sister store and many suppliers are located restrict special calling numbers 976 1900 outside operator etc 911 always allowed 40 general office phones long distance allowed during day mode restrict special calling numbers 976 1900 outside operator etc 911 always allowed 10 purchaser buyer telephones no time restriction 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 309 Appendix A ARS and TRS Operation Section 700 Operation restrict special calling numbers 976 1900 outside operator etc 911 always allowed 25 executive office telephones no time restriction no calling restrictions 2 attendant group phones no restrictions during the day local calls only at night to prevent abuse 7 wareh
341. xclusive Hold DSLT 216 Key Telephone 126 SLT 261 Floating Hold Key Telephone 125 SLT 260 Floating HoldDSLT 215 Key Telephone 124 SLT 259 System Hold DSLT 214 Key Telephone 124 SLT 259 Call Park DSLT 219 Key Telephone 127 217 SLT 263 Call Pickup DSLT 219 Extension Direct Pickup DSLT 220 Key Telephone 131 SLT 264 Extension Group Pickup DSLT 219 Key Telephone 129 SLT 263 Key Telephone 129 SLT 263 Trunk Direct Pickup DSLT 221 Key Telephone 132 SLT 266 Trunk Group Pickup DSLT 221 Key Telephone 131 SLT 265 Call Progress Tones 27 Call Routing Network 57 Call Transfer DSLT 222 Key Telephone 132 Network 57 SLT 266 Supervised DSLT 222 Key Telephone 132 SLT 266 Unsupervised DSLT 223 Key Telephone 134 SLT 267 Call Waiting Automatic Camp on DSLT 224 Key Telephone 141 SLT 269 Manual Camp on DSLT 224 Key Telephone 141 SLT 269 Camp on DSLT 224 Key Telephone 141 SLT 268 Callback Message Key 166 Message Waiting DSLT 232 Key Telephone 167 SLT 278 Callback Request DSLT 209 Key Telephone 119 SLT 255 Caller ID Call Log Key Telephone 136 Caller ID Logging Extensions 106 Setting 106 Calling Network Extension 57 Camping on Busy Extension Call Transfer DSLT 223 Key Telephone 135 SLT 268 Camp on Call Waiting Automatic DSLT 224 326 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 576 13 700 Section 700 Operation Index Key Telephone 141 SLT 269 DSLT 224 Key Telephone 141 Manual DSLT 224 Key Telep
342. y Operation System vs Exclusive Considerations e Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive when placed on hold by pressing the HOLD key Broker s Hold Broker s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by pressing the HOLD key Operation To place a call on Broker s Hold Action Result 1 Pick up the first call 2 Press the HOLD key First call on hold 3 Pick up the second call 4 Press the HOLD key Second call on hold first call retrieved Hardware Hequirements N A Related Programming e Broker s Hold Considerations e In order to use Broker s Hold with CO calls the first call must have a possible appearance and non appearance but in the case of appearance the first call must be one of CO key Call Park You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call even if you cannot locate the intended recipient of the call CO Extension and Network calls may be parked There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the DBS 576 One way is to park the call at the receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialing the park answer code plus the parking extension number The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 127 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700
343. ys Press the FF key to be checked Programmed data displays Fei ree ses Replace the handset or press the ON OFF key Hardware Requirements N A Related Programming FF1 2 Dial Plan FF3 Extension Numbers FF4 FF Key Assignment 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 153 Chapter 5 Key Telephone Features Section 700 Operation Considerations e Ifanew code is programmed into a key the previously programmed code is erased FF keys assigned as CO lines must be cleared using system programming before new FF assignments can be made System can be programmed so that 1 Trunk Access calls automatically use Automatic Route Selection ARS The ANSWER key functions as listed in the table below Status Condition Operation when ANSWER key is pressed Idle No incoming ring Ignore Incoming ring Monitor ON speaker Auto Answer for incoming ring Off Hook Off hook signaling Answer for off hook signaling Current conversation will be put on hold automatically No off hook signaling Ignore NOTE When the extension has 1 non appearing CO on hold and 1 non appearing CO at talk ANSWER key oper ation is ignored and you can t put the 2nd non appearing CO on hold The RELEASE key functions as listed in the table below Status Condition Operation when RELEASE key is pressed Idle Ignore M
344. z amp sp ABCDEF GHIJKL MNOPQR GTUVWX C Yz To enter D a Press the first one touch key from the left on the bottom row b Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row BIGITAL MODE Cor B C D E F arrea C J J 2 0 o A F a MER SEX Mee lu a ja ja To enter 0 a Press the third one touch key from the left on the top row 576 13 700 DBS 576 USA Revised 6 11 98 53 Chapter 3 System Features Section 700 Operation b Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row BIGITAL MODE END O gt m no p qr O PROG e ms ese E gt C5 A E 4 MiB 8 X v J C ii QJ CONF la ja Jiu jm j Hardware Requirements e N A Related Programming e N A Considerations e Extension names can be up to 10 characters in length e The ability to make extension name assignments is allowed restricted to anyone with a Class of Service COS that allows access to User Maintenance features See Chapter 4 User Maintenance of this document Speed Dial Name Assignments You can assign names to Personal Speed Dial PSD num

Panasonic 524X07801B Telephone User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents